Yamaha CS1X El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario
1
PRECAUTIONS
IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ
BEFORE PROCEEDING.
Following the important precautions below will help ensure you
many years of trouble free use from your CS1x.
LOCATION
In order to avoid causing serious damage to
the CS1x, do not expose it to direct sunlight,
high temperatures, excessive humidity,
excessive dust or strong vibration.
Always place the CS1x on a solid surface such
as a keyboard stand or a sturdy table or desk.
POWER SUPPLY
Turn the power switch off when the CS1x is
not in use.
Use only the supplied PA-3B or an equivalent
AC power adaptor. Use of an incompatible
adaptor may result in irreparable damage to
the CS1x, and could even pose a serious
shock hazard.
The power adaptor should be unplugged
from the AC outlet if the CS1x is not to be
used for an extended period of time.
Unplug the CS1x during electrical storms.
Avoid plugging the CS1x into the same AC
outlet as appliances with high power
consumption such as electric heaters or
ovens. Also avoid using multiple-plug
adapters since these can result in reduced
sound quality and possibly even damage to
the instrument.
UNPLUG ALL INSTRUMENTS
WHEN MAKING CONNECTIONS
To avoid causing damage to the CS1x and
other devices to which it is connected, such
as a sound system or MIDI instruments, turn
off the power and unplug all related devices
prior to connecting or disconnecting audio
and MIDI cables.
ELECTRICAL INTERFERENCE
Avoid using the CS1x near televisions, radios
or other devices which generate
electromagnetic fields, since this may cause
the CS1x to malfunction, and possibly
generate interference noise in the other
devices.
BACK-UP BATTERY
The CS1x contains a special long-life battery
that retains the contents of its User memory
when the power is turned off. The back-up
battery should last for several years. When it
needs to be replaced, the message "Battery
Low" will appear in the display when the
power is turned on. When this happens, have
the backup battery replaced by qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
Do not attempt
to replace the backup battery yourself.
HANDLING AND TRANSPORT
Always handle the CS1x with care. Physical
shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or
placing heavy objects on it can result in
serious damage to the CS1x.
Never apply excessive force to the controls,
connectors or other parts.
Disconnect all cables before moving the
CS1x. Always unplug cables by gripping the
plug firmly, and not by pulling on the cable.
CLEANING
Never use chemical solvents or thinners to
clean the CS1x, since these will damage the
finish or dull the keys. Wipe the instrument
clean with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use
a soft, clean cloth slightly moistened with a
diluted, mild detergent. Then wipe the
instrument thoroughly with a dry cloth.
Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the
instrument, since vinyl can stick to and
discolor the surface.
DATA BACKUP
Yamaha recommends that you regularly save
your music data using an external MIDI data
storage device such as the Yamaha MDF2
MIDI Data Filer. Yamaha cannot be held
responsible for the accidental loss of CS1x
data.
SERVICE AND MODIFICATION
The CS1x contains no user serviceable parts,
so never open the case or tamper with the
internal circuitry in any way. Doing so may
result in electrical shock or damage to the
instrument. Refer all servicing to qualified
Yamaha service personnel.
IMPORTANT NOTE
Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage
to the CS1x resulting from improper handling
or operation, or for the accidental loss of CS1x
data.
NOTICES
• The company names and product names in
this owner's manual are the trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
• The LCD screens as illustrated in this owner's
manual are for instructional purposes, and may
appear somewhat different from the screens
which appear on your instrument.
2
In the beginning, there was the knob…
And the knob was good. Great, in fact.
You could just reach out and grab it. Turn it left. And turn it right.
Interact with it in realtime.
And there were knobs of all kinds. Knobs for changing the attack
and release times of a sound. Knobs for setting the cutoff filter and
resonance. And knobs for controlling many other aspects of analog
synthesizer sounds.
By twisting a knob one way and another, a vast, practically endless
variety of electronic sounds could be called forth. Fat sounds. Strange
sounds. Beautiful sounds. Magical sounds.
It was the 1960s, and such was the power of the knob that music
was changed forever.
And the term synthesizer became a household word.
But the knob was not perfect…
From the start the knob was brilliant and easy to grasp. It put the
musician in complete control of the sound. And opened up a whole
new world of sonic exploration.
It was the 1970s, and some of the greatest recordings in music history
were being made. Analog "synths" were finding their way into the stages,
studios and professional composing suites of the world.
But as simple, straightforward and powerful as analog synths were,
they were also for the most part priced out of reach of the struggling
musician. Plus they tended to be sensitive to slight fluctuations in electric
current which frequently wreaked havoc with pitch, thus making tuning
inherently unstable.
And there was no reliable way to save panel settings and original
sounds except for tediously scrawling lists and notes with pencil and
paper.
Surely there must be a better way.
Engineers the world over went to work searching for a better way,
and great strides were made in the development of more stable, lower
cost, and more convenient technologies.
A breakthrough in electronic sound synthesis was imminent.
Then came the miracle of digital…
The beginning of the 1980s saw breakthroughs in digital synthesizer
technology which was to once again revolutionize modern music.
Musicians everywhere embraced affordable new technologies like
FM, which could accurately reproduce the sound characteristics of
acoustic and other instruments, and AWM (PCM), which relied on
"samples" of actual instrument sounds to produce an amazing wealth
of musical textures and sonic options.
The new spate of digital synthesizers were—on the outside—much
more streamlined than analog synths, sporting a minimal array of buttons
and a display screen which provided information about each feature.
Overnight the knob was rendered virtually obsolete.
Unstable tunings were a thing of the past. Memory was the future.
Digital synths were—on the inside—more loaded than ever, as
hundreds of amazing acoustic and electronic sounds, or voices, could
be stored and recalled at the touch of a button. Scores of new and exciting
features were available. Entire panel settings and configurations could
also be stored for instant recall.
It was the digital revolution that made MIDI, GM, XG, sequencing,
sampling, looping, multitimbral play, DSP effects and many other
breakthroughs in electronic music technology possible.
Developments that have changed forever the way we teach, compose,
Introduction
2
3
on the panel.
A collection of six rotary Sound Control Knobs are irresistible to the
touch—and provide instant sonic results when turned.
Between the Sound Control Knobs, the clearly labeled panel switches,
and the back lit LCD, the current status of the CS1x is always crystal
clear.
The numeric keypad and other buttons—including Scenes, or
"snapshots" of knob positions—give you quick and easy access to any
parameter or setup you need, the moment you need it.
As such, the CS1x is an unprecedented realtime performance
instrument.
The hundreds of great sounding AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory
2) instrument voices (created from high quality recordings of actual
instrument and other sounds), three digital effects units (with 11 Reverb,
11 Chorus and 43 Variation type effects) and scores of other parameters
can be configured in an almost unlimited variety of ways and stored in
memory for instant recall.
Performances, or complete configurations of up to four Layers
(voices) playing simultaneously, plus effect and other parameters, and
Multis, or a configuration of up to 16 Parts and other parameters for
multitimbral play (using an external sequencer or computer), provide a
unique array of options which make the CS1x a handy synth for literally
any type of music situation.
Thirty-two notes of polyphony ensure that you always have enough
available notes to play even the most demanding arrangement.
The on-board arpeggiator which can generate various types of
automatic arpeggios or be controlled by an external MIDI clock provides
an extremely useful tool for spicing up your masterpieces—or setting
the dance floor on fire.
Go forth and multiply…
As simple—yet powerful—as the CS1x is on its own, it has also
been specially engineered to easily fit right into any type of expanded
music system you wish to create.
General MIDI (GM) compatibility makes the CS1x an ideal
multitimbral tone generator for accurately playing any of the many
Standard MIDI File or other commercially available GM music data using
an external sequencer.
XG compatibility makes the CS1x completely state of the art—
conveniently able to take advantage of the expanded sound and
expressive capabilities that this exciting new format will offer in the
coming months and years.
A TO HOST terminal and HOST SELECT switch provides for direct
interface with either PC and Macintosh computers, thus enabling you
to easily jump right into the "desktop music" revolution without the
need for any additional peripheral interfacing equipment.
If you're a first-time synthesizer owner, the CS1x lets you expand
your music system at your own pace.
First you might want to add an affordable Yamaha QY series
sequencer and take advantage of the CS1x's powerful multitimbral
capabilities. With a QY sequencer you can record and play back up to
16 music "parts", each on an independent MIDI channel—just like a
multitrack recorder, but with virtually unlimited editing capabilities.
Next you might want to add the compact, low-cost Yamaha SU10
sampler which lets you capture music phrases and other sounds to add
an entirely unique dimension to your music.
Finally you might want to add a computer which will let you take
advantage of the many different types of music software products now
available plus those yet to come.
With the CS1x at the heart of your system, you're ready to grow
your own unique music system and take your musical capabilities as far
as you want—naturally.
perform and listen to music.
Global design standards ensured that music hardware and software
products made by different manufacturers could work together
seamlessly.
But alas, digital did not create a perfect world.
Chaos reigned over the land…
As convenient, dynamic and accessible as digital synthesis was, still
it was not perfect. It had certain limitations, though different ones than
analog synthesis.
Streamlined panel layouts and the demise of the knob meant that
all those hundreds of great new features had to be organized and stacked
in pages and subpages of hidden menus—which might mean several
presses of one or more buttons just to find a feature, and several more
to actually manipulate it.
And the steep learning curve of many digital synthesizers became a
legend unto itself. Alarmingly, the synth was on its way to becoming a
thing of science, rather than an intuitive musical instrument.
It was, therefore, inevitable that many would come to mourn
nostalgically for the days of simplicity—for the knob. For those warm,
fat, wonderful analog sounds. For fewer hidden features.
And for a simpler, easier to use electronic instrument.
There was a definite need for an analog-style digital synthesizer
that would have intuitive knobs plus all the benefits of digital memories
and other convenient—especially interactive—features.
One that could satisfy even the most die-hard advocate of analog or
digital synthesis.
A perfectly versatile synthesizer as attractive to first-time synth
owners as to desktop music hobbyists, serious amateurs, and even
seasoned professionals.
A powerful stand-alone performance instrument with hot dance
music and other versatile voices, as suited for the cutting edge as for the
classics.
An ideal multitimbral MIDI component which could fit right into
even the most sophisticated expanded system.
One with extremely modest pricing for such powerful utility.
It was only a matter of time before the thunder of analog would
unite with the lightning of digital to once again challenge convention
and ultimately change the landscape of music possibilities yet once more.
And Yamaha heard their cries…
Fortunately Yamaha recognized that something new and significant
must be created to bring together the best of both analog and digital
worlds.
The result was the Yamaha Control Synthesizer CS1x.
The CS1x takes the best of analog—simplicity of use, natural
interactivity, thick sound, and, of course, the knob—and unites it with
the best of digital—reliable pitch, plenty of memory, one-touch setting
reconfigurations, hundreds of voices, MIDI, and much, much more—
to begat a truly unique "control" synthesizer.
One with all the familiar concepts loved by both analog and digital
afficianados. One destined to satisfy even the most meticulous purist in
each camp.
Nothing to hide…
Perhaps the most striking—certainly refreshing—aspect of the CS1x
Control Synthesizer is the way it wears its heart on its sleeve.
What you see is what you get: all features are self-evidently displayed
3
4
CS1x MAIN
FEATURES
The CS1x is specially designed with an intuitive, interactive user interface
through lots of dedicated panel controls and sound editing features which
can easily be manipulated in realtime during performance. Main features
include:
6 Sound Control Knobs for direct access to key parameters of the currently
selected voice as you play, and 2 Scene memories for instant recall of
specified Sound Control Knob positions. You can use the Modulation
Wheel or a connected Foot Controller for continuous changes between
Scene 1 and Scene 2 parameter values.
480 GM- and XG-compatible AWM2 instrument voices and 11 drum
voices, or kits, in Multi Play mode. Additional voices are available in
Performance mode which can be assigned to the Performances.
Performance mode with complete configurations of Layers (4 voices either
stacked or in sophisticated keyboard and velocity splits), digital effects
and other parameters. There are a total of 128 Preset Performances and
128 User Performances.
Multi Play mode for multitimbral play of up to 16 different Parts (across
16 MIDI channels; when using an external sequencer), with 32-note
polyphony. TO HOST terminal and HOST SELECT switch allow direct
interface with IBM PC/AT or Apple Macintosh computers.
3 independent DSP digital effect units which can be used simultaneously—
Reverb (11 types), Chorus (11 types) and Variation (43 types).
Arpeggiator with 30 types of arpeggiated chords and 10 timing subdivisions.
The Arpeggiator's tempo can also be controlled by an external MIDI
clock.
5
CONTENTS
The CS1x At A Glance .....................................6
Getting Started ............................................9
How The CS1x Generates Sound ................... 12
CS1x Main Operating Modes ........................ 14
Feature Reference ............ 20
Performance Mode .....................................20
Common Edit 1........................................ 22
Common Edit 2 ....................................... 25
Layer Edit 1 ............................................. 27
Layer Edit 2 .............................................30
Layer Edit 3 ............................................. 31
Layer Edit 4............................................. 33
Multi Play Mode.......................................... 36
Utility Mode ...............................................40
Store Mode .................................................44
Factory Settings .........................................46
Appendix ............................. 47
Digital Effects ............................................ 47
About MIDI ................................................. 53
Specifications ............................................. 57
Troubleshooting ......................................... 58
Error Messages ........................................... 59
Index..........................................................60
6
THE CS1x AT A
GLANCE
ATTACK
PHONES L/MONO
OUTPUT
R DC IN POWER
FOOT
VOLUME
FOOT
CONTROLLER
FOOT
SWITCH
TO HOSTINPUT HOST SELECT IN OUT
MIDI
THRU
AMP EG
RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATAVOLUME
CUTOFF
FILTER
RESONANCE ASSIGN 2
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
VWX
PROGRAM
+
PERFORMANCE STORE
MULTI
PRESET USER ARPEGGIATOR
UTILITY
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
PITCH MODULATION
Front
Panel
! VOLUME
Turn this knob to set the proper
listening level whether using
headphones or amplified speakers.
" SOUND CONTROL
KNOBS
The six Sound Control Knobs give
you direct access to key parameters
of the currently selected
Performance/voice. Turning any
Sound Control Knob to the left or
right will offset the parameter values
accordingly (left for negative values,
right for positive values) and
produce an immediate result; a letter
"E" will appear next to the
Performance number in the LCD to
indicate the original voice has been
edited. Each knob has a center
detent which represents the original
value of the parameter.
ATTACK (Knob 1) - This knob
controls the initial attack time of the
voice. Turn it left for a faster attack
time; turn it right for a slower attack
time. (See page 30)
RELEASE (Knob 2) - This knob
controls the release time of the voice.
Turn it left for a shorter release time;
turn it right for a longer release time.
(See page 32.)
ASSIGN 1/DATA (Knob 3) - This
knob has two functions. As an
ASSIGN 1 knob, you can assign one
of 28 parameters—including
Performance Volume, Arpeggiator
Tempo or Type, Portamento Time,
and others—to control by turning it
(see page 26). As a DATA entry knob,
you can use it to quickly change the
edit value of the currently selected
edit parameter.
CUTOFF (Knob 4) - This knob
determines the cutoff frequency of
the filter, or the frequency point
above which other frequencies are
filtered out. Turn it left for a deeper,
more rounded tone; turn it right for
a thinner, brighter tone. (See page
25.)
RESONANCE (Knob 5) - This knob
determines the amount of filter
resonance or emphasis of the cutoff
frequency. Turn it left to produce a
relatively flat response; turn it right
to add overtones and make the
sound more resonant. (See page 34.)
ASSIGN 2 (Knob 6) - This knob can
be used to control any one of 28
parameters which you can assign to
it—including Volume, Note Shift,
Pan, Chorus Send, and others. (See
page 29.)
# SCENE 1 & 2
Each Performance has two Scene
memories which remember specific
positions of the six Sound Control
Knobs. (See page 16.)
Simply press SCENE 1 or SCENE 2
to instantly recall the specified
settings. An LED beside each SCENE
button will light to indicate which
Scene is currently active. You can
store your own Scenes in advance
using Store mode. (See page 44.)
By holding one SCENE button and
then pressing the other SCENE
button, both LED's will light,
indicating that you can use the
Modulation Wheel or a connected
Foot Controller for realtime
continuous parameter changes
between one Scene and the other.
(See page 45.)
$ ARPEGGIATOR
Press this button to activate the on-
board Arpeggiator, which lets you
create automatic arpeggios simply
by playing a chord. An indicator will
appear in the lower right area of the
LCD when the Arpeggiator is on.
(See page 22.)
There are various Arpeggiator Types
and Arpeggiator Timing
Subdivisions. These, plus the
Arpeggiator Tempo, can be specified
with the Common Edit 1 menu
parameters. (See page 23.)
Pressing this button while holding
SHIFT will "hold" the arpeggiated
chord, or make it continue playing
even when you release the keys.
Pressing this button again stops the
Arpeggiator. (See page 23.)
An Arpeggiator Split function lets you
split the keyboard at C3; the chords
you play to the left of the split point
will create arpeggiated chords, and
the notes and chords you play to the
right of the split point will play as
normal. (See page 23.)
7
% SHIFT
This button lets you transpose the
octave up or down as well as
activate the Arpeggiator Hold and
Split functions. (See page 23.)
To transpose the octave, hold the
SHIFT button and press [–] (octave
down) or [+] (octave up)—located
directly beneath the SHIFT button.
(See page 15.)
& PART/LAYER [–]/[+]
These buttons let you select one of
the four Layers in Performance
mode (see page 14), or one of the
16 Parts in Multi Play mode (see
page 17). Which Layer or Part is
currently selected will be indicated
in the lower right area of the LCD.
' PRESET
In Performance mode, press this
button to activate the bank of 128
Preset Performances. (See page 20.)
( USER
In Performance mode, press this
button to activate the bank of 128
User Performances. (See page 20.)
) PROGRAM [–]/[+]
Press one of these to step up ([+]) or
down ([–]) through each
Performance (in Performance mode)
or voice (in Multi Play mode), one
at a time. (See page 20.)
* BACK LIT LCD
The LCD provides various types of
information which clearly indicates
the current operating status of the
CS1x, depending on which mode
or other button on the front panel
that you press.
+ NUMERIC KEYPAD
The numeric keypad has several
functions, depending on the
currently selected mode.
In Performance mode or Multi Play
mode, you can use it to select a
specific Performance number or
voice number—by punching in the
desired number (1~128), then
pressing the ENTER button. (See page
20.)
In Quick Program Change mode,
you can use it to select a specific
Performance (Performance mode)
or voice (Multi Play mode) within
the currently designated group of
10—by simply punching in the last
digit (0~9) of the desired
Performance or voice number. (See
page 21.)
When editing parameters, you can
use it to quickly select a specific
value—by punching in the desired
number, then pressing ENTER. (See
page 20.)
When naming a User Performance,
you can use it to select the letters of
the name, as indicated above each
button. (See page 24.)
, [–]/NO/QUICK PC
This button has three functions.
As a [–] button, you can use it to
enter negative values when editing
parameters using the numeric
keypad. Press it before entering the
number, followed by ENTER.
In Performance mode or Multi Play
mode, press it once to engage the
Quick Program Change function.
The hundredth and tenth digits of
the Performance or voice number
will be shown as bold characters
to indicate they are fixed when
Quick Program Change is active.
Press the button again to turn off
Quick Program Change. (See page
21.)
In Store mode, this button lets you
decline (NO) the store operation if
you change your mind.
- ENTER/YES
This button has three functions.
When selecting a Performance
number (Performance mode) or
voice number (Multi Play mode)
using the numeric keypad, you
must press ENTER to activate the
change. (See page 20.)
When designating edit parameter
values using the numeric keypad,
you must press ENTER to activate
the change. (See page 22.)
In Store mode, this button lets you
confirm (YES) the store operation.
(See page 44.)
. MODE SELECT
SWITCHES
Press one of these to select the
current operating mode.
PERFORMANCE - In Performance
mode you can choose any of the
Preset or User Performances, plus
perform editing operations using the
Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and
Parameter Value UP/DOWN
buttons. Press PERFORMANCE to
enter Performance mode from
another mode, or to reselect the
Performance select screen in the
LCD after performing an edit
operation in Performance mode.
(See page 20.)
MULTI - Press this button to enter
Multi Play mode, which lets you
designate up to 16 Parts for
multitimbral play when using an
external sequencer. Parameters
which can be edited in Multi Play
mode are printed in a row directly
above the Parameter Value UP/
DOWN buttons. (See page 36.)
STORE - This button lets you store
User Performances. as well as
Scenes. (See page 44.)
UTILITY - Press this button to access
those "system" parameters which
affect the CS1x as a whole—such as
Master Tune, MIDI Transmit and
Receive Channel numbers, Local
On/Off, etc.—as printed directly
below each Parameter Value UP/
DOWN button. (See page 40.)
/ EDIT PARAMETER
ROTARY SWITCH
Turn this knob to select one of the
six menus of edit parameters in
Performance mode.
COMMON - The Common
parameters (Common Edit 1, 2
menus) are those parameters which
apply to the entire currently selected
Performance; i.e., it doesn't matter
which Layer is currently selected,
since common parameters (except
for Portamento) apply to all layers
equally. (See page 14.)
LAYER - The Layer parameters (Layer
Edit 1, 2, 3, 4 menus) are those
parameters which affect only the
currently selected Layer (1~4, as
designated by the PART/LAYER
buttons) in a Performance. (See page
14.)
0 PARAMETER VALUE
UP/DOWN BUTTONS
These ten buttons are used to access
specific parameters in Performance,
Multi and Utility modes, as well as
change the values of the currently
selected edit parameter.
PERFORMANCE MODE - After
selecting an Edit menu row with the
Edit Parameter Rotary Switch, press
the Parameter Value UP/DOWN
button located beneath the desired
parameter once to access the
parameter. The parameter name and
current value will appear in the LCD.
Then press [UP] or [DOWN] to
increase or decrease the current
parameter value as desired. (See
page 14.)
MULTI PLAY MODE - Simply press
the Parameter Value UP/DOWN
button located beneath the desired
parameter as printed on the panel,
directly above each button. The
parameter name and current value
will appear in the LCD. Then press
[UP] or [DOWN] to increase or
decrease the current parameter value
as desired. (See page 17.)
UTILITY MODE - Simply press the
Parameter Value UP/DOWN button
located above the desired parameter
as printed on the panel, directly
below each button. The parameter
name and current value will appear
in the LCD. Then press [UP] or
[DOWN] to increase or decrease the
current parameter value as desired.
(See page 40.)
1 PITCH
The Pitch Wheel lets you bend the
pitch up or down as you play. It is
spring-loaded to automatically
return to center position when you
let go of it. In Performance mode
you can designate the Pitch Bend
Range in the Common Edit 2 menu.
(See page 25.)
2 MODULATION
The Modulation Wheel lets you
apply or set a designated amount of
vibrato or tremolo. You can set it to
affect filter cutoff, filter modulation,
pitch modulation (Common Edit 2
menu, see page 25), as well as other
controllable parameters. (see page
43.)
8
# TO HOST
The TO HOST terminal lets you
connect the CS1x directly to a host
computer which does not have a
MIDI interface. (See page 10.)
$ INPUT
Connect an external audio source
(such as a keyboard, or CD player)
here using either a stereo or mono
mini plug, in order to mix its audio
signals with the CS1x's voices, for
output from the CS1x without the
need for an external mixer.
% FOOTSWITCH
An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5
footswitch connected to this jack
can be used to control hold on/off,
portamento on/off and others,
determined by the Assign Control
Change Number setting in Utility
mode. (see page 43.)
& FOOT CONTROLLER
An optional Yamaha FC7 or FC9
foot controller connected to this jack
can be used for control of filter
modulation, filter cutoff, and the
Rear
Panel
! MIDI
MIDI IN, OUT and THRU terminals
let you connect other MIDI devices
such as a MIDI keyboard, tone
generator, sequencer, or computer
with a MIDI cable. (Set the HOST
SELECT switch to MIDI when using
the MIDI terminals.) MIDI IN is for
input of MIDI data. MIDI OUT is
for output of MIDI data and for data
dumps to another CS1x or MIDI data
storage device. MIDI THRU is for
"daisy-chain" connection of
additional MIDI instruments, as the
MIDI data received at the CS1x's
MIDI IN terminal is passed along
unchanged to the CS1x's MIDI
THRU terminal. (See page 9.)
" HOST SELECT
The HOST SELECT switch lets you
designate the type of host computer.
(See page 10.) Set it to MIDI for
normal MIDI transmission and
reception when a host computer is
not connected.
Variation effect (Common Edit 2
menu, see page 26), as well as the
Control Change Number. (see page
43.)
' FOOT VOLUME
An optional Yamaha FC7 or FC9
foot controller connected to this jack
can be used to regulate overall
volume.
( POWER
Press this switch to turn the CS1x
on and off.
) DC IN
Connect the supplied Yamaha PA-
3B Power Adaptor here.
(CAUTION: Do not attempt to use
an AC adaptor other than the
Yamaha PA-3B or equivalent, since
the use of an incompatible adaptor
may cause irreparable damage to
the CS1x, and may even pose a
serious shock hazard.)
MIDI
OUTTHRU IN MIDI Mac TO HOST INPUT SWITCH CONTROLLER
ASSIGNABLE
FOOT FOOT
VOLUME
FOOT
ON OFF
DC IN R L/MONO
OUTPUT PHONES
POWER
PC-2 PC-1
HOST SELECT
THE CS1x AT A GLANCE
* OUTPUT
The stereo OUTPUT jacks let you
connect the CS1x to an external
stereo amplifier/speaker system.
When using a mono system,
connect it to the L/MONO jack.
+ PHONES
The PHONES jack lets you connect
a set of stereo headphones for
private listening.
9
GETTING STARTED
Setting Up Your CS1x
The CS1x With An External
Sequencer
The illustration below shows how to use the CS1x with a Yamaha QY
series sequencer, which lets you take full advantage of the CS1x's
multitimbral capability to play up to 16 different musical instrument Parts
at once.
You will need MIDI cables to make the proper connections.
1. Connect a MIDI cable from the CS1x's MIDI OUT terminal to the
sequencer's MIDI In terminal, and connect another MIDI cable from
the CS1x's MIDI IN terminal to the sequencer's MIDI Out terminal.
2. Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI.
QY300 etc...
QY300
MUSIC SEQUENCER
MIDI IN
MIDI
OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
HOST SELECT
PC-2 PC-1
MIDI Mac
CS1x
In this case, the notes you play on the keyboard will be sent as MIDI note
event data to a specified MIDI channel of the sequencer. By selecting
different channels, you can record each Part independently, while listening
to those Parts you've already recorded.
When recording Parts to an external sequencer, you need to turn the
keyboard Local setting to OFF (see page 42). When keyboard Local is
turned off, the notes you play on the keyboard will not sound the CS1x's
internal tone generator, but note and other performance event data will
still be sent from the MIDI OUT terminal.
Since the CS1x's internal tone generator will respond to note and other
data it receives at the MIDI IN terminal, the notes you play on the keyboard
will be sent to the sequencer, then "echoed back" to the CS1x to play one
of the 16 Parts (depending on the current MIDI channel assignment).
For details about assigning CS1x MIDI channels, see page 41. For details
about assigning MIDI channels and other settings for the external devices
such as a sequencer, consult the owner's manual of each.
The Control Synthesizer CS1x literally comes ready to play right out of
the box.
Connect the supplied PA-3B DC power adaptor to the CS1x's DC IN
connector on the rear panel. Then connect the adaptor to the nearest
electrical outlet.
Before
switching on the power, connect any peripheral devices such as
amplified speakers or MIDI instruments.
There are many ways to incorporate the CS1x into a simple or expanded
music system. Below are a few examples to get you started.
CAUTION
• Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the PA-3B. Use of an
incompatible adaptor may result in irreparable damage to the CS1x, and
could even pose a serious shock hazard.
• Be sure to disconnect the power adaptor from the electrical outlet when
the CS1x is not in use.
The CS1x By Itself
At the simplest level, all you need to do is connect stereo headphones to
the PHONES jack located on the rear panel.
As a stand-alone performance instrument, simply connect the CS1x to
amplified speakers, as follows:
For stereo use, connect one end of a pair of audio cables to the CS1x's
OUTPUT (L/MONO, R) jacks, and the other end to each amplified
speaker's input, as shown in the illustration below. (For mono use, connect
one end of a single audio cable to the CS1x's L/MONO jack, and the
other end to the amplified speaker's input.)
AMPLIFIED
SPEAKERS
R INPUTL
R OUTPUTPHONES
L
CS1x
CAUTION
In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected
electronic equipment, before switching on the power of any component,
make sure the CS1x's volume level and the volume levels of the connected
equipment are set to minimum.
10
Connecting The CS1x To A
MIDI Data Storage Device
You can also connect the CS1x with a MIDI data storage device, such as
the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer in order to "bulk dump", or save a
User Performance ("1 Perf" setting) or all the User Performances and Utility
parameters ("All" setting) to floppy disks.
This lets you build up complete libraries of Performance and other data,
which you can easily load back into the CS1x. (The MDF2 also lets you
play compatible song data on the CS1x directly from the MDF2 itself,
without the need for a sequencer.)
For information about how to perform Bulk Dump operations with the
CS1x, see page 42. Refer to the owner's manual of the MIDI data storage
device for operating instructions about sending and receiving data.
MDR SEO JOB UTIL
MIDI
MDF2
MIDI DATA FILTER
CURSOR
- FILE DATA +
REC PAUSE START/STOP
TEMPO
MDF2 etc...
MIDI IN
MIDI
OUT
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
HOST SELECT
PC-2 PC-1
MIDI Mac
CS1x
The CS1x In A Desktop Music
System
With its built-in host computer interface the CS1x is designed for direct
connection to an Apple Macintosh, IBM PC/AT or NEC PC-9800 Series
computer—without the need for a special MIDI interface between the
computer and the CS1x.
Using the CS1x in a computer music system lets you receive the full
benefits of the instrument's true capabilities, as well as take advantage of
the ever-expanding world of available music sequencer and other software
products which provide you with unlimited potential to achieve your
personal music goals.
If your computer already has a MIDI interface installed, you may want to
use it rather than using the host computer interface on the CS1x. Otherwise,
depending on the computer or interface used, set the HOST SELECT
switch to the appropriate setting: MIDI, PC-1 (NEC PC-9800 Series), PC-
2 (IBM and clones), or Mac (Macintosh). For information on the types of
cables that can be used for connection, see the section
MIDI/Computer
Connecting Cables
, at right.
TO HOST
Connecting Cables
HOST SELECT
PC-2 PC-1
MIDI Mac
Computer
CS1x
Macintosh
If you have an Apple Macintosh not equipped with an external MIDI
interface, perform the following operation:
1. Set the HOST SELECT switch to Mac.
2. Connect the TO HOST terminal on the CS1x to the Modem or
Printer port on the Macintosh.
3. Turn on the host computer, then turn on the CS1x.
4. Start up your music software, and set up the appropriate options
in the software for operation with the CS1x.
The options you may have to set for the Apple MIDI Driver settings:
MIDI Interface Type (Clock) 1 MHz
Other options and settings may have to be made as well. Refer to the
owner's manual of your particular music software for more information.
IBM PC and Clones
If you have an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer not equipped
with an external MIDI interface, perform the following operation:
1. Set the HOST SELECT switch to PC-2.
2. Connect the TO HOST terminal on the CS1x to one of the
computer's serial ports, COM 1 or COM 2.
3. Turn on the host computer, then turn on the CS1x.
4. Start up your music software, and set up the appropriate options
in the software for operation with the CS1x.
Refer to the owner's manual of your particular music software for
more information.
MIDI/Computer Connecting
Cables
MIDI
Standard MIDI cable, maximum length 15 meters.
Mac
Apple Macintosh Peripheral cable (M0197), maximum length 2 meters.
PC-1
8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 25-pin cable, maximum length 1.8 meters.
(If your PC-1 type computer has a 9-pin serial port, use the PC-2 type
cable.)
PC-2
8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 9-pin cable, maximum length 1.8 meters.
11
Playing
Arpeggiated
Chords
Take a moment and try out the Arpeggiator function, which creates
automatic arpeggios based on the chords you play. First select a
Performance with a fast attack, such as a percussive type sound. (Note:
The Arpeggiator function only works in Performance mode.)
1. Press ARPEGGIATOR. An indicator will appear in the lower right
area of the LCD.
2. Play a chord. The arpeggiated chord will begin playing, based on the
Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and Subdivide parameter settings.
3. Change the Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and Subdivide parameters using
the Common Edit 1 menu. (See page 22.)
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
Arpeggiator Hold
The handy Arpeggiator Hold function lets you play a chord to start the
automatic arpeggio, then take your hand off the keyboard—the arpeggiated
chord will play continuously in a loop. Play another chord and the
automatic arpeggios will change accordingly.
1. Hold SHIFT and press ARPEGGIATOR. The Arpeggiator indicator in
the LCD will start blinking.
2. Play a series of chords.
3. To stop the arpeggiated chords, press ARPEGGIATOR again.
Arpeggiator Split
The Arpeggiator Split function greatly increases the performance capability
of the CS1x. When Arpeggiator Split is engaged, any chord you play to
the left of the split point (B2 and below) will produce an arpeggiated
chord, while chords you play to the right of the split point will play
normally.
1. Press ARPEGGIATOR to activate the Arpeggiator function.
2. Set the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch to the Common Edit 1 menu.
3. Hold SHIFT and press the left-most Parameter Value UP/DOWN
button (Arpeggiator Type parameter).
4. Pressing [UP] will turn on the Arpeggiator Split feature (the letter "S"
will display in the LCD); pressing [DOWN] will turn it off.
Switching On
The Power And
Producing
Sound
Once all connections have been properly made, you're ready to switch
on the power and start having fun with the CS1x.
1. Turn the volume of the CS1x to its minimum position.
2. Press the POWER switch, located on the rear panel.
3. After a brief greeting message, the CS1x will power up.
4. Gradually turn the VOLUME knob to the right while playing the
keyboard until you achieve a comfortable listening level.
Playing The
Demo Songs
Before you dive in and start exploring the many Performances and other
versatile features of the CS1x, you may want to listen to the preprogrammed
demonstration song.
The Demo provides a dynamic example of just how powerful the CS1x
really is. To play the Demo, perform the following operation:
1. In Performance mode, hold the PERFORMANCE button and press
the MULTI button.
2. The word "DEMO" will appear in the LCD, and after a brief moment
the Demo song will begin, and continue playing.
3. To stop the Demo, simply press a mode button, such as
PERFORMANCE.
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
When the Demo mode is engaged, you can select a Demo song from the
various Demo songs using the numeric keypad.
12
How The CS1x
Generates Sound
Oscillators, Filters And
Amplifiers
Synthesizers rely on three key electronic components to imitate the
soundwaves of musical instrument voices, as well as create entirely new
sounds.
In traditional analog synthesis the source sound pitch is generated by an
oscillator
, its tone is created by a
filter
, and its volume is determined by
an
amplifier
.
AMPLIFIERSFILTERSOSCILLATORS
DETERMINES
VOLUME
CREATES
TONE
GENERATES
PITCH
! The oscillator generates sound wave vibrations at controllable speeds,
or frequencies, to create pitch. Synthesizer oscillators usually offer a
range of frequencies between 20 Hz and 20kHz, which is the range
of the audio spectrum that most human beings can hear. They also
usually offer various types of sound waveforms, such as sine, sawtooth,
and others.
" Musical instrument sounds are made up of the basic tone that we
clearly distinguish, plus additional harmonics, or overtones which
exist at each octave above the basic tone, but that we cannot distinctly
hear. The filter provides control over these harmonics. By manipulating
the filter's cutoff frequency, which decides where to delete—or cut
off—the overtones, and resonance settings, you can thus determine
the tone.
# An amplifier controls the volume of the tone. An envelope generator
(EG) determines the tone's volume over time, through attack, decay,
sustain and release settings.
AWM2 Waveforms
The CS1x takes the familiar concepts and functions of analog synthesis
and combines them with the state of the art in digital synthesis technology.
As such, it has hundreds of AWM2 waveforms, or digital recordings
("samples"), of all types of musical instrument and other sounds
programmed right inside—including everything from a violin bow
scraping a string, to a mallet striking a marimba, to a breath blowing
across a flute mouthpiece.
An AWM2 waveform forms the fundamental tone source of a CS1x voice;
the rest of the sound is contoured by the oscillator, filter and amplifier
settings. CS1x synthesis gives you enormous realtime and other control
over detailed aspects of all parameter settings.
In order to better understand what's actually happening to the sound as
you turn the Sound Control Knobs or modify other parameters, it is helpful
to first take a look at the key components which make up the physical
nature of sound.
The Nature
Of Sound
What is sound? If we could see sounds they would look like waves rippling
through the air at a constant speed with high frequencies bunched close
together and lower frequencies spread far apart.
Our ears are naturally designed to take these physical vibrations—or
sound waves—moving through the air around us at high, mid and low
frequencies, and interpret them as a dog barking across the street, someone
practicing a violin next door, a jet airplane screaming overhead, or rock
music on the stereo in front of you.
Generating
Electronic
Sounds
There are three basic elements which make up a sound:
pitch
, or how low or high it is
tone
, or what its overall quality is like
amplitude
, or how loud its volume level is
Before we take a look at how the CS1x generates and manipulates pitch,
tone and amplitude, lets first take a look at how these elements apply
naturally to acoustic musical instruments.
Acoustic musical instruments are specifically designed and carefully built
to produce precise sound characteristics when played—which is why a
violin always sounds like a violin, a piano always sounds like a piano,
and a flute always sounds like a flute.
A musician playing a finely crafted violin will scrape the bow across the
string at a certain intensity to generate violin sound waves at a certain
volume level (
amplitude
), and produce low or high notes based on
fingering positions (
pitch
). The vibrating strings and resonating wood, as
well as the playing style and technique of the musician, will determine
the overall quality of the violin's sound (
tone
).
13
CS1x Synthesis
The secret behind the CS1x's exceptional quality sound is its ability to create rich and complex sonic textures in Performances, which are made up of
Layers of up to four AWM2 voices—either sounding simultaneously or mapped to various note and velocity zones across the keyboard.
AMPLIFIERS EFFECTSFILTERS
AWM2 WAVEFORM
BANK
PROGRAM NUMBER
CONTROLLER
OSCILLATORS
AWM2 VOICE
LEVEL
ATTACK LEVEL
( ATK LEVEL )
RELEASE LEVEL
( REL LEVEL )
TIME
RELEASE TIME
( REL TIME )
BASIC KEY
PLAYED
INITIAL LEVEL
( INIT LEVEL )
ATTACK TIME
( ATK TIME )
DECAY TIME
( DCY TIME )
RELEASE TIME
( REL TIME )
CUT OFF
FREQUENCY
PITCH VOLUME
TIME
LEVEL LEVEL
KEY ON
KEY OFF
ATTACK TIME
( ATK TIME )
DECAY TIME
( DCY TIME )
TIME
ATTACK TIME
( ATK TIME )
DECAY TIME
( DCY TIME )
SUSTAIN LEVEL
( SUS LEVEL )
RELEASE TIME
( REl TIME )
KEY ON
KEY OFF
KEY ON
KEY OFF
LFO
SUSTAIN LEVEL
(SUS LEVEL)
! AWM2 WAVEFORM - The fundamental source
of the CS1x's sound is the sampled AWM2
waveform. There are hundreds preprogrammed in
ROM which are used by the Performances.
Available waveforms are organized in Banks. Each
AWM2 waveform has its own Program Number.
" AWM2 VOICE - The AWM2 waveform combines
with the oscillator, filter and amplifier to make up
a CS1x voice.
PEG - The Pitch Envelope Generator controls how
the pitch changes over time.
INIT LEVEL (Initial Level) sets the initial pitch level
when a key is played.
ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its Attack Level after
a note is played.
ATK LEVEL (Attack Level) sets the initially targeted
level after a note is played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its basic pitch from
the Attack Level while the key is held.
REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it
takes for the basic pitch to reach the Release Level
after the key has been released.
REL LEVEL (Release Level) sets the final targeted
level after the key is released.
FEG - The Filter Envelope Generator controls how
the timbre changes over time.
ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its maximum cutoff
frequency level when a note is played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from
the maximum level while the key is held.
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) sets the Sustain Level;
the cutoff frequency will be maintained at this level
for as long as the key is held.
REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it
takes for the cutoff frequency to reach the level
preset for each voice after the key has been released.
AEG - The Amplitude Envelope Generator controls
how the volume changes over time.
ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its maximum volume
level when a note is played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time
required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from
the maximum volume level while the key is held.
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) sets the Sustain Level;
the volume will be maintained at this level for as
long as the key is held.
REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it
takes for a sound to sustain after the key has been
released.
# LFO - The Low Frequency Oscillator generates low
frequency signals which can be used to modulate
the PEG, FEG and AEG.
PMOD - The LFO can apply Pitch Modulation to
the PEG to create vibrato effects.
FMOD - The LFO can apply Filter Modulation to
the FEG to create wah-wah types of effects.
AMOD - The LFO can apply Amplitude
Modulation to the AEG to create tremolo effects.
$ CONTROLLER - You can use several types of
controllers to manipulate various parameters in
realtime.
MW - Use the Modulation Wheel to control
PMOD, FMOD, and Filter Cutoff.
FC - Use the Foot Controller to control FMOD,
Filter Cutoff, and Variation Effect.
Use the Sound Control Knobs to control AEG Attack
Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, and Resonance.
The ASSIGN 1/2 knobs can be specified to control
one of any number of parameters. (See the lists on
pages 27 and 29.)
14
CS1x MAIN
OPERATING
MODES
The CS1x has two main operating modes: Performance mode and Multi
Play mode. The chief distinction between each mode is as follows:
Performance mode is primarily for realtime performance of
Layers
. It
has six menus of Edit parameters.
Multi Play mode is primarily for multitimbral playback of up to 16
Parts
when external MIDI devices are connected. It has one menu of
Edit parameters. You can also use the CS1x as a MIDI data input
device for an external sequencer.
Utility mode lets you modify System and MIDI parameters which affect
both Performance and Multi Play mode. (For more information about
Utility mode, see page 40.)
Store mode lets you store your own User Performances and Scenes. (For
more information about Store mode, see page 44.)
Performance
Mode
If you're in a different mode, press the PERFORMANCE button to enter
Performance mode.
In Performance Play mode you can select a Performance from 128 Preset
Performances and 128 User Performances and begin playing.
A
Performance
is comprised of up to four "Layers", or AWM2 voices
sounding at once—either playing simultaneously across the length of the
keyboard, or playing independently according to specified key and
velocity ranges.
There are many Performance parameters which you can edit by
offsetting
parameter values—i.e., adding to or subtracting from the values which
are preset for each voice. There are basically two ways to go about offsetting
the parameters—by turning the Sound Control Knobs, or using the Edit
Parameter Rotary Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons.
Changing any parameter will automatically engage Performance Edit
mode. (You can easily switch back Performance Play mode by pressing
the PERFORMANCE button or PROGRAM [–]/[+] button.)
ATTACK
AMP EG
RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATAVOLUME
CUTOFF
FILTER
RESONANCE ASSIGN 2
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
Turning the Sound Control Knobs will give you direct access to the AMP
EG and FILTER parameters, thus providing analog-style realtime control
over key characteristics of the sound. You can also save up to two
"snapshots" of knob positions in Scenes, which can be instantly recalled
at the touch of a SCENE button.
Another way to edit a Performance is with the Edit Parameter Rotary
Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. These give you control
over both "Common" parameters which affect all Layer voices equally,
and "Layer" parameters which affect individual Layers, or AWM2 voices.
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
Edit Parameter Rotary Switch
Parameter Value UP/DOWN Buttons
In Performance mode there are six Edit menus of Common and Layer
parameters which can be accessed via the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch
and modified with the Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons.
Try changing the voice assignments to each Layer. This is a quick and
effective way to create an entirely new Performance, which you can
easily store as a User Performance.
Assigning voices to the Layers is simple. Choose the Layer (1~4) with the
PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons, and select from a variety of AWM2
instrument voices and drum voices using the Bank and Program
Parameters (Layer Edit 4, sixth row from the top).
15
next to the Performance number, to indicate
that the edited sound has not been stored.
Offset AMP EG and FILTER parameters to
change the shape and tone of the sound as
you play by turning the Sound Control Knobs.
Replace the Layer voice assignment, or edit
other Performance Common and Layer
parameters, with the Edit Parameter Rotary
Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN
buttons.
Press ARPEGGIATOR to turn it ON, and play
a chord to start the arpeggiated chords. Select
Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and other
parameters from the Common Edit 1 menu.
STORE
Store mode lets you store Scenes as well as
User Performances for later recall.
Store your favorite Scenes, or "snapshots" of
Sound Control Knob positions, in the currently
selected Performance. (See page 44.)
Store your own Performances in the 128 User
Performance memories. (See page 44.)
PERFORMANCE
PLAY
Performance Play mode lets you select a
Preset or User Performance for realtime play.
Press the PERFORMANCE button to enter
Performance mode (if you're in a different
mode).
Press either the PRESET or USER button to
select the Preset or User Performance bank.
Choose a Performance with the PROGRAM
[–]/[+] buttons.
Use realtime control features as you play,
including the Pitch Bend and Modulation
Wheels.
Transpose the octave up or down by holding
SHIFT and pressing PART/LAYER [–]/[+]. You
can transpose the pitch up ([+]) or down ([–])
by as many as three octaves, depending on
the Performance. (The transpose value will
also be reflected in the Utility mode's
Keyboard Transpose function. NOTE:
Maximum is ±3 octaves; however, when you
raise or lower the pitch in semitones, for
example, three octaves cannot be achieved
using the SHIFT button.)
PERFORMANCE EDIT
Making any adjustment—either intentionally
or inadvertently—to any parameter will
engage Performance Edit mode. When
exiting from the Performance Edit mode (by
pressing PERFORMANCE or PROGRAM
[–]/[+]), an "E" will be displayed in the LCD
Basic
Operations In
Performance
Mode
Basic
Operations In
Performance
Mode
15
16
Performance Structure
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
VOICE
Layer 3
VOICE
001
Performance
Layer 4
Layer 2
VOICE
Preset Bank User Bank
128 Performance
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
128 Performance
Layer 1
VOICE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
LAYER EDIT
COMMON EDIT
REAL TIME EDIT with
THE SOUND CONTROL KNOBS
STORE IN USER BANK
SAVE AS SCENE 1 or 2
ATTACK
AMP EG
RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA
CUTOFF
FILTER
RESONANCE ASSIGN 2
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
! PERFORMANCE BANKS - The CS1x comes preprogrammed with
128 Preset Performances and 128 User Performances. You can edit
the Layers of the currently selected Performance and store it in a User
Performance.
" LAYERS - A Performance consists of up to four Layers—each Layer
can be assigned its own AWM2 voice. There are many Layer and
Common Performance parameters which can be edited.
# AMP EG/FILTER - Turning the Sound Control Knobs will affect all
Layers equally by offsetting AMP EG parameters to control the shape
of the volume of the sound over time, and FILTER parameters to control
the quality of the tone. In Edit mode you can assign which parameters
the ASSIGN 1 and ASSIGN 2 knobs will control.
$ COMMON EDIT 1~2 - These are "Common" parameters which affect
all Layers in the Performance equally.
% LAYER EDIT 1~4 - These are "Layer" parameters which let you modify
the characteristics of each individual Layer. Select the Layer you want
to edit using the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons.
Storing User Performances
Storing your own User Performance is a quick and simple operation.
1. To store the current Performance, press the STORE button once.
2. Choose a User Performance number (1~128) using the numeric
keypad.
3. Press ENTER.
A "Sure?" prompt will appear in the LCD. Press YES to store the
Performance. Press NO to abort the operation.
Scenes
There are two "Scene" memories dedicated to each Performance. Scenes
are simply "snapshots" of specific positions of the Sound Control Knobs—
instantly accessible via the SCENE buttons.
You can select one of the Scenes by pressing the SCENE 1 or SCENE
2 button. Or you can hold one SCENE button and press the other,
then use the Modulation Wheel or Foot Controller for realtime
continuous parameter changes between one Scene and the other.
The default controller is Modulation Wheel. The minimum position
of the controller is Scene1, and the maximum position is Scene 2.
Storing Scenes
You can easily store your own Scenes in a Performance—either
temporarily or permanently.
To store a Scene temporarily in the currently selected Performance, hold
a SCENE button and press STORE.
This will store the Scene in the edit buffer as long as the current Performance
is selected, so that the original Scenes are protected. If you select another
Performance, any new Scenes will be lost.
To store a Scene permanently in a Performance, simply perform the Store
operation for User Performances. (See
Storing User Performances
, above.)
17
Multi Play
Mode
In Multi Play mode you can select a voice from the GM bank of 128
AWM2 voices (accessible via the PROGRAM [–]/[+] buttons) and start
playing in realtime.
Multi Play mode lets you use the CS1x as a master keyboard controller or
MIDI note data input device, as well as a multitimbral tone generator.
A
Multi
is a configuration of up to 16 instrument "Parts" (each Part is
assigned to a MIDI channel) which can be played simultaneously when
an external sequencer or computer is connected to the CS1x.
Choose the Part with the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons, and assign a voice
to it by selecting from the 480 GM- and XG-compatible AWM2 normal
(instrument) voices and 11 drum voices (kits), using the Edit menu Bank
and Program Parameter Value UP/DOWN button.
In Multi Play mode there is one menu of Edit parameters which can be
accessed via the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button.
Turning the Sound Control Knobs will affect only a single AWM2 voice,
i.e., the currently selected Part.
Multi Structure
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Part 1~16
BANK
PROGRAM
VOLUME
PAN
EFFECT
FILTER
POLY/MONO
PART SELECT
PART SELECT - In Multi Play mode each "Part" is made up of an AWM2
voice. You can select and play any of the 16 Parts by pressing the PART/
LAYER [–]/[+] buttons. Since the notes you play on the keyboard and the
buttons you press on the panel are sending MIDI messages, the CS1x is
ideal as a MIDI input device.
EDITING PARTS - Select the Part you want to edit using the PART/LAYER
[–]/[+] buttons. Each of the Multi parameters are printed above the
Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. To set up your own 16 Parts, assign
a voice to the Part using the Bank and Program parameters accessible by
the first two Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. (Note that these settings
will not be retained when the power is turned off, since the XG default
parameters are always reinstated when the power is turned on. If you
insert voice Program Change messages at the head of your sequences,
however, the right Part voices will always be selected automatically when
you start your sequencer from the beginning of the song.)
MULTITIMBRAL PLAY - As a GM- and XG-compatible multitimbral
MIDI tone generator, the CS1x can receive note and other data on each
of the 16 MIDI channels, sent from an external sequencer or computer,
thus playing the corresponding 16 Parts.
XG Operation
The CS1x is a fully equipped, stand-alone XG-MIDI tone generator,
featuring a total of 480 normal voices and 11 drum voices.
The XG format maintains the universality and compatibility of the MIDI
and General MIDI System Level 1 standards, while significantly increasing
the range of expressiveness through much greater control over voice
modifications and effects.
In addition to supporting the 128 GM voices, the XG format provides for
Bank Select messages that significantly expand the number of voices
available for use.
Many of the new XG voices are variations of basic GM voices which are
stored in additional banks. Each bank is associated with a specific type of
variation, so that voices are easy to locate. When using an external
sequencer to control the CS1x, additional banks are selected by the
appropriate Bank-Select LSB values.
The XG format also supports a full SFX bank of extension effects, which
are selected by a Bank-Select MSB value of 40H. Bank-Select MSB 7H,
in contrast, can be used to set any channel to rhythm-part play.
The XG format allows creation of extremely expressive control data which
can change a voice's Harmonic Contents, Brightness, and many more
critical Control Change and other parameters.
The XG format also offers high level effects support, enabling control of
effects types, circuit operation, plus internal parameter settings for both
basic and elaborate effects. This means you can freely control the
parameters of the CS1x's 11 Reverb, 11 Chorus and 43 Variation types of
effects independently.
(For more information about MIDI related parameters, see the
Appendix
,
page 53.)
The CS1x also features another play mode —TG300B mode— which
lets you play back commercially available MIDI files in this format.
18
20
Selecting a Performance
1. Use the numeric keypad (0 ~ 9) to select the Performance
number you want.
For more information about each Performance, see the
Performance List in the "Data List" book.
2. Press the ENTER button to confirm the Performance number
(1~128). The Performance name and number you have
selected will display in the LCD. The Category name will be
shown next to the Performance name.
Press the PROGRAM [+] button to select the next Performance
number. Press the PROGRAM [-] button to select the previous
Performance number.
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
VWX
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
Performance Name
Category
Performance Number
NOTE
VWX
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
Entering Performance Mode
Press the PERFORMANCE button. A [] mark will appear in the
LCD below the word "PERFORMANCE".
Performance Play Mode
Selecting a Bank
There are 2 banks, a Preset bank and a User bank. Each bank
contains 128 Performances.
Press the PRESET button or the USER button to select the bank you want.
A [] mark will appear in the LCD above the word "PRESET" or "USER".
RPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
RPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
Preset Bank User Bank
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
128 Performance
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
128 Performance
PERFORMANCE STORE
MULTI
PRESET USER ARPEGGIATOR
UTILITY
ERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
In Performance mode you can choose from 128 Preset and 128 User Performances. A Performance consists of a
maximum of four layered sounds (voices). The Performance Edit function lets you easily edit each Layer within a
Performance. The various parameters give you the flexibility to create a vast variety of sounds.
Following is a description of each function in the various modes.
21
Quick Program Change
Press the QUICK PC (Quick Program Change) button in the numeric
keypad to fix all the numbers except the first digit of the Performance
number in the LCD. By pressing a button in the numeric keypad
(0~9), you can quickly select the Performance numbers within a
group of ten by changing the first digit of the Performance number.
The hundredth and tenth digits will be shown as bold characters to
indicate they are fixed. This lets you quickly switch between ten types
of Performances during a live performance. To cancel the function,
press the QUICK PC button again.
You can also use the Quick Program Change function when
selecting the program number for each Part in Multi Play mode (page 36).
Performance Edit Mode
You can edit any Preset or User Performance to create your
own unique Performance by changing the various
parameters, including the voice assignment to each Layer.
You can then store the Performance you have edited in a User
Performance number (1~128).
Changing any parameter in a Performance will
automatically engage Performance Edit mode.
Edit parameters are basically divided into two groups:
Common parameters equally applied to all the Layers in a
Performance, and Layer parameters independently set for each Layer
in a Performance.
NOTE
Preset Bank User Bank
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
128 Performance
007
006
005
004
003
002
001
128 Performance
001
Performance
Layer 4
Layer 3
Layer 2
Layer 1
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
VOICE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
LAYER EDIT
COMMON EDIT
Realtime edit with Sound Control Knobs
Store into a Performance
Select SCENE 1/2
ATTACK
AMP EG
RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA
CUTOFF
FILTER
RESONANCE ASSIGN 2
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
NOTE
NOTE
Edit Procedure
1. Select the Edit function.
Turn the Edit Parameter Rotary switch to choose the Common or Layer
Edit menu with the parameter you want to edit.
2. Select a Layer (if you want to change the Layer parameters).
Use the LAYER [-]/[+] buttons to select the Layer you want to edit.
You do not need to select a Layer if you are editing the
Common parameters, since these are applied equally to all Layers in
a Performance.
3. Select a parameter.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to the
parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter. The current
settings will display in the LCD.
4. Set the value.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the value.
Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes the value
continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and the [DOWN]
button decreases the value.
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC
VEL
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
S
P
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
C
D
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC
VEL
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SW
VA
PAR
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CU
DE
W
D
T
LO
NOTE
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
22
To exit Performance Edit mode, press the PERFORMANCE
button again or the PROGRAM [-]/[+] button. You can enter Multi Play
mode directly from Performance mode by pressing the MULTI button.
Edit Mark
Once you have edited a Performance in any way, an edit mark (a
reversed type letter "E") will appear to the left of the Performance
number. This mark indicates you have edited, but not stored the
Performance.
The edit mark will also appear simply by making a slight
position change to a Sound Control Knob (see page 6).
Description of Each Function
Common Edit 1 (applied to all Layers)
This row provides functions and parameters which are common
to all Layers in a Performance, such as the Arpeggiator, and the
Performance Level, Effect and Name.
ARPEGGIATOR
The Arpeggiator automatically creates arpeggiated chords
based on the chords/melodies you play on the keyboard. There
are three Arpeggiator parameters: TYPE, TEMPO and SUBDIVIDE.
TYPE TEMPO
SUBDIVIDE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
COMMON
LAYER
NOTE
Indicates you have edited,
but not stored the Performance.
NOTE
You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data
Entry knob to change the value.
To change the value for all four Layers at one time, hold
SHIFT and press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. When you
press SHIFT in Performance Edit mode, a letter "A" (All) will appear in
the LCD below the word "LAYER".
Each voice is preset with optimum settings for the parameters,
and the value you set for any parameter will offset (add or subtract) the
preset value. If the value of a parameter exceeds the maximum or
minimum limit available, the highest or lowest value will be used.
The actual value is the sum of the value displayed in the
LCD and the value set by the Sound Control Knob.
The original voice can be restored and heard by returning
to Performance Play mode and moving the Sound Control Knob to the
center position.
You can replace the voices currently assigned to each Layer
with new voices or assign a voice to an empty Layer (up to four
voices/Layers for a Performance).
5. Set the other parameters.
As you continue pressing the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN
buttons, the other parameters will appear in the display. Set the other
parameters to your preference.
6. Store the Performance.
When you have finished editing, store the Performance as a User
Performance. For details about how to store a Performance, see page 44.
The edited contents will be retained in memory even if you
turn the power off during an edit. The Performance you were editing
will still be selected the next time you turn the power on, and you will
be able to pick up from where you left off and continue editing the
Performance.
While editing a Performance, if you select another
Performance or press the PERFORMANCE button again to exit
Performance Edit mode before you have first stored the data as a
User Performance, your edited data will be lost. For details about
storing a User Performance, see page 44.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR
PROGRAM
SYSTEM
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
D
VO
F
L
TUNE
AEG
FEG
L
L
C
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
NOTE
NOTE
23
To start the Arpeggiator, press the ARPEGGIATOR button to turn it
on. A [] mark will appear in the LCD above the word
"ARPEGGIATOR".
To turn the Arpeggiator off, press the ARPEGGIATOR button
again.
TYPE: Sets the type of arpeggio. You can choose from 30 types.
For details about each type, see the Arpeggiator Type List in the
"Data List" book.
Arpeggiator Hold
The Arpeggiator Hold function lets you play a chord to start the
automatic arpeggio, then take your hand off the keyboard; the
arpeggiated chord will play continuously in a loop. Play another
chord and the automatic arpeggios will change accordingly.
To activate the Arpeggiator Hold function, perform the following:
1. Hold SHIFT and press ARPEGGIATOR. The Arpeggiator indicator in
the LCD will start blinking.
2.Play a series of chords.
3.To stop the arpeggiated chords, press ARPEGGIATOR again.
Arpeggiator Split
If you hold SHIFT and press the Parameter Value [UP] button when
the TYPE parameter is displayed in the LCD, the Arpeggiator Split
function will be enabled, and a reversed type letter "S" will appear
to the right of the Arpeggiator type.
The Split function splits the keyboard from C3 (indicated above the
keyboard with [
]) and will allow you to play the arpeggiated chords
on the lower half (below C3) of the keyboard, and play a melody line on
the upper half (C3 and above).
To cancel the Split function, hold SHIFT and press the Parameter
Value [DOWN] button.
TEMPO: Sets the tempo of the Arpeggiator. The range is MIDI, 40
~ 240.
Settings:
TEMPO: MIDI, 40 ~ 240 (beats per minute)
If you want to synchronize the tempo of the Arpeggiator
with that of an external MIDI device, set the TEMPO parameter to MIDI.
SUBDIVIDE: Determines the basic note settings (how fine the
tempo is divided) of the Arpeggiator.
The Arpeggiator data cannot be output as the MIDI messages.
NOTE
Settings:
SUBDIVIDE: 3/8= , 1/4= , 3/16= , 1/6= , 1/8= , 3/32= ,
1/12= , 1/16= , 1/24= , 1/32=
NOTE
NOTE
PERFORM LEVEL
This sets the volume of each Performance.
Settings:
PERFORM LEVEL (Performance Level): 0~127
EFFECT
There are five effect parameters: REV TYPE (Reverb Type), CHO
TYPE (Chorus Type), VARI TYPE (Variation Type), VARI PARAM
(Variation Parameter) and VARI DATA (Variation Data).
For more basic information on each effect, see page 47.
REV TYPE (Reverb Type): Sets the Reverb type. You can choose
from 11 types. For more information about each Reverb type, see
Effect Type List on page 49.
CHO TYPE (Chorus Type): Sets the Chorus type. You can choose
from 11 types. For more information about each Chorus type, see
Effect Type List
on page 49.
VARI TYPE (Variation Type): Sets the Variation effect type. There are
43 types to choose from. For more information about each Variation
effect type, see Effect Type List
on page 49.
VARI PARAM (Variation Parameter): Selects the Variation effect
parameters. Parameters will differ depending on the Variation
effect type selected in VARI TYPE.
Reverb Type Chorus Type
Variation Parameter
Variation Type
Variation Data
The letter "P" (Parameter) or "d"
(Data) displays to distinguish
between the Variation Parameter
and Variation Data screens.
24
PERFORM NAME (Performance Name)
This lets you select the Category and name the User Performances
using up to eight letters, numbers, symbols and characters.
1. Use the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to move the
cursor to the position at which you want to enter a
character.
2. Move the cursor left-most if necessary (the word
"Category" will appear instead of the Performance
name) and use the numeric keypad (0~9) to select the
Category.
3. Move the cursor one position to the right (the current
cursor position will start blinking) and use the numeric
keypad (0~9) to select the first letter, then right one
position more and select the second letter, etc., until you
complete your Performance name.
Settings:
A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z ' a b c d e f g
h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 - / . , * & _
(space)
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
KBD
TRANS
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
SUS
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
LOCAL
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
BULK
DUMP
PERFORM
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
CTRL
NO
COMMON
LAYER
UTILITY
# LCD Category Name
0 -- Not specified
1 Pf Piano
2 Cp Chromatic Percussion
3 Or Organ
4 Gt Guitar
5 Ba Bass
6 St Strings/Orchestral
7 En Ensemble
8 Br Brass
9 Rd Reed
10 Pi Pipe
11 Ld Synth Lead
12 Pd Synth Pad
13 Fx Synth SFX
14 Et Ethnic
15 Pc Percussive
16 Se Sound Effect
17 Dr Drums
18 Sc Synth Comping
19 Vo Vocal
20 Co Combination
21 Wv Material Wave
22 Sq Sequence
If you select EFFECT OFF in the Variation Type menu, the
layers which have the VARI SEND function set to ON will not sound.
When you don't want to use the Variation Effect on the layers, set VARI
TYPE to Thru.
Variation effect works as an Insertion effect in Performance
mode. For more information, see page 47.
For more information about each Variation effect parameter, see
Effect Parameter List on page 49.
VARI DATA (Variation Data): Sets the data (value) of the
Variation effect parameter selected in VARI PARAM. For more
information about each Variation effect data, see the Effect Data
Assign Table on page 51.
When VARI TYPE is turned off, VARI PARAM and VARI DATA
will be disabled.
The effect depth and other parameters can be controlled
using the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or a Foot Controller. For
details, see page 26.
For more information, see page 47.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
25
Common Edit 2 (applied to all Layers)
This row provides functions and parameters which are common
to all Layers in a Performance (except for "Portament"), including
the settings for realtime controllers such as the Pitch Wheel,
Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller.
P BEND RANGE (Pitch Bend Range)
This sets the Pitch Bend range in semitones. The pitch can be
bent up or down within the range set here by moving the Pitch
Wheel.
Settings:
-24 ~ +24 semitones
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
PROGRAM
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
VOLUME
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
PAN
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
POLY/
MONO
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
LAYER
TYPE
P BEND
RANGE
TEMPO
ARPEGGIATOR PERFORM
LEVEL
EFECT
PMOD
SUB
DIVIDE
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
CUTOFF
PERFORM
NAME
ASSIGN1
PARAM
COMMON
MW (Modulation Wheel)
This sets the control parameters of the Modulation Wheel. There
are three parameters: PMOD (Pitch Modulation), FMOD (Filter
Modulation) and CUTOFF (Cutoff). The parameters set here can
be controlled with the Modulation Wheel to add vibrato or
tremolo effects to the sound.
PMOD (Pitch Modulation): Sets the pitch modulation depth
created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here
will determine the range of the pitch modulation by the
Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up will
increase the depth of the pitch modulation, while moving it
down will decrease the depth.
FMOD (Filter Modulation): Sets the filter modulation depth
created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here
will determine the range of the filter modulation by the
Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up will
increase the depth of the filter modulation, while moving it down
will decrease the depth.
CUTOFF (Cutoff): Sets the range of the cutoff frequency points
above which the other frequencies are cut off. The value set here
will determine the range of the cutoff frequency points when
using the Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up
will raise the cutoff frequency point (i.e., make the voice
brighter), while moving it down will lower the cutoff point (i.e.,
make the voice darker).
Settings:
PMOD (Pitch Modulation): 0~127
FMOD (Filter Modulation): 0~127
CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63
Pitch Modulation Filter Modulation
Cutoff
26
PORTA (Portamento)
This sets the Portamento function. Portamento continuously
changes the pitch from one note to the next, thus letting you
glide the pitch from one note to the next. There are two
parameters, SWITCH and TIME. Values can be set for each Layer.
SWITCH: Turns the Portamento on or off. (for each layer)
TIME: Sets the time it takes for the pitch to reach the next note
played. (for all layers)
Settings:
SWITCH: on, off
TIME: 0~127
ASSIGN1 PARAM (ASSIGN 1 Parameter)
This determines which parameter will be controlled by the
ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob. You can choose from 28 types of
parameters.
The parameter assigned to the ASSIGN1 knob as the default
differs depending on the Performance selected.
Settings:
For details about each parameter, see the reference pages as
listed on the next page.
Switch Time
FC (Foot Control)
This sets the parameters controlled by a Foot Controller
connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel.
There are three parameters: FMOD (Filter Modulation), CUTOFF,
and VARI EF (Variation Effect).
FMOD (Filter Modulation): Sets the filter modulation depth
created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here
will determine the range of the filter modulation by the Foot
Controller. Pressing the Foot Controller will increase the depth of
the filter modulation.
CUTOFF: Sets the range of the cutoff frequency points above
which other frequencies are cut off. The value set here will
determine the range of the cutoff frequency points by the Foot
Controller. Pressing the Foot Controller will raise the cutoff
frequency point (i.e., make the voice brighter).
VARI EF (Variation Effect): Determines the Variation effect range
set by the EFFECT parameters (page 23), controlled by the Foot
Controller.
For details about which parameters the Foot Controller can
control, see the Effect Parameter List on page 49.
Settings:
FMOD (Filter Modulation): 0~127
CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63
VARI EF (Variation Effect): -64 ~ +63
NOTE
Filter Modulation Cutoff
Variation Effect
27
Parameters with an asterisk affect entire Layers in a Performance. You
cannot directly edit them from the LCD, but you can assign them to the
ASSIGN 1 knob.
You can also select each parameter by inputting the corresponding
number using the numeric keypad.
Layer Edit 1 (independently applied to each Layer)
The functions in this row provide various parameters mainly
related to the keyboard such as Tune, Note Limit and Velocity.
The parameters can be set for each Layer in a Performance.
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
PROGRAM
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
VOLUME
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
PAN
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
POLY/
MONO
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
LAYER
# LCD
0 off
1 PerfLevel (Performance Level) (page 23)
2 ArpgTempo (Arpeggiator Tempo) (page 23)
3 ArpgType (Arpeggiator Type) (page 23)
4 ArpgSubdiv (Arpeggiator Subdivide) (page 23)
5 MWCutoff (MW Cutoff) (page 25)
6 MWPModDpth (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) (page 25)
7 MWFModDpth (MW Filter Modulation Depth) (page 25)
8 PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) (page 25)
9 FCCutoff (FC Cutoff) (page 26)
10 FCFModDpth (FC Filter Modulation Depth) (page 26)
11 FCVariDpth (FC Variation Depth) (page 26)
12 PortaTime (Portamento Time) (page 26)
13 *FEGDcyTime (FEG Decay Time) (page 32)
14 *AEGDcyTime (AEG Decay Time) (page 30)
15 *ChoToRev (Chorus Send To Reverb)
16 *VariCntrl (Variation Control)
17 *RevChoSend (Reverb And Chorus Send)
18 *ChorusSend (Chorus Send) (page 38)
19 *ReverbSend (Reverb Send) (page 38)
20 *Pan (page 38)
21 *LFOSpeed (LFO Speed) (page 31)
22 *LFOPMod (Vibrato Depth) (page 30)
23 *VibDelay (Vibrato Delay)
24 *LFOAMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) (page 30)
25 *LFOFMod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) (page 31)
26 *FEGAtkTime (FEG Attack Time) (page 32)
27 *FEGSusLvl (FEG Sustain Level) (page 32)
28 *FEGVelSens (FEG Level Velocity Sensitivity)
29 *Pitch (Oscillator Pitch)
TUNE
This sets the tuning of a Layer. There are two parameters, NOTE
SFT (Note Shift) and DETUNE.
NOTE SFT (Note Shift): Raises or lowers the pitch of the voice in
semitones.
Settings:
-24 ~ +24 (semitones)
DETUNE: Raises or lowers the pitch of the voice in fine
increments or decrements (0.1 Hz each).
Settings:
-12.8 Hz ~ +12.7 Hz
NOTE
This sets the range of notes that each Layer will play. There are
two parameters, LIMIT LOW and LIMIT HIGH.
LIMIT LOW: Determines the low note limit, or the lowest note
that will be played by the voice.
LIMIT HIGH: Determines the high note limit, or the highest note
that will be played by the voice.
Settings:
LIMIT LOW: C-2 ~ G8
LIMIT HIGH: C-2 ~ G8
It is not possible to set the LIMIT LOW note above the LIMIT
HIGH note, or the LIMIT HIGH note below the LIMIT LOW note.
NOTE
C1 C2 C3 C4 C5
C6
36 48 60 72 84
96
CS1x Keyboard
Note Name
Note Number
LIMIT LOW is set to C2 and LIMIT HIGH is
set to C4. Range of notes that can be played.
• • • G8
• • • 127
C-2 • • •
0 • • •
Limit Low Limit High
Note Shift Detune
28
OFFSET: Sets the offset value of the velocity. The value set here
will be added to or subtracted from the actual velocity value.
Settings:
OFFSET: -64 ~ +63
DEPTH: Sets the depth of the velocity. The larger the value, the
more sensitive the velocity will be, and playing the keyboard will
produce louder sounds.
Settings:
DEPTH: 0~127
VELOCITY DEPTH GRAPH (When OFFSET=64)
OFFSET=63
VOLUME
DEPTH=96, OFFSET=64
DEPTH=64
OFFSET=63
DEPTH=32
OFFSET=63
DEPTH=0, OFFSET=63
VELOCITY RECEIVED
VELOCITY OFFSET GRAPH ( When DEPTH = 64)
VELOCITY RECEIVED
OFFSET=-64
DEPTH=64
VELOCITY LEVEL RECEIVED
BY TONE GENERATOR
(OFFSET=63)
(OFFSET=0)
OFFSET=-64
OFFSET=0
DEPTH=64
OFFSET=63
DEPTH=64
VELOCITY=127
VELOCITY=1
Range
determined
by offset
Range
determined
by offset
VEL (Velocity)
This determines the velocity settings for the voice in each Layer.
There are four parameters: LIMIT LOW, LIMIT HIGH, OFFSET and
DEPTH.
LIMIT LOW: Determines the lowest velocity value that will be
detected when the keyboard is played. No sound will be
produced if the keyboard is played with a velocity value weaker
than the one set here.
LIMIT HIGH: Determines the highest velocity value that will be
detected when the keyboard is played. No sound will be
produced if the keyboard is played with a velocity value stronger
than the one set here.
Settings:
LIMIT LOW: 1~127
LIMIT HIGH: 1~127
It is not possible to set the LIMIT LOW note above the LIMIT
HIGH note, or the LIMIT HIGH note below the LIMIT LOW note.
NOTE
VELOCITY (Playing Strength)
VOLUME
0 30 100 127
When LIMIT LOW is set to "30" and LIMIT HIGH is set to "100"
Velocity range that can be played is limited as shown in the
illustration.
Limit Low Limit High
Offset Depth
29
ASSIGN2
This sets the control parameter and knob sensitivity of the
ASSIGN 2 Sound Control Knob. It is possible to assign up to four
parameters from 28 types. It is also possible to set the sensitivity
(control range of the knob) for each parameter.
The parameter assigned to the ASSIGN2 knob as the default
differs depending on the Performance selected.
1. Select the Layer.
Press the LAYER [-]/[+] button to select the Layer to which you
want to assign a parameter.
2. Select the item (parameter type or sensitivity) you want
to edit and the assignment number which you want to
assign the parameter to.
Press the Parameter Value [UP] button to select the item
(parameter type or sensitivity) you want to edit, and the
assignment number. Each time you press the (PARAM)
Parameter Value [UP] button, the arrow cursor will move as
shown in the following illustration.
Each time you press the (PARAM) Parameter [DOWN] button, the
arrow cursor will move in the opposite direction.
3. Move the cursor to the Parameter type area and press
the (DATA) Parameter UP/DOWN button to select the
parameter type.
Settings:
The following parameters can be assigned to assignment
number 1 ~ 4. For details about each parameter, see the
reference pages as listed below.
When voices are not assigned to the Layers (Bank=Off),
Parameter type and sensitivity will not display.
NOTE
▲▼
Parameter type of assignment number 1
Sensitivity of assignment number 1
Parameter type of assignment number 2
Sensitivity of assignment number 2
Parameter type of assignment number 3
Sensitivity of assignment number 3
Parameter type of assignment number 4
Sensitivity of assignment number 4
Parameter Type
Layer
Assignment Number
Sensitivity
Parameter with an asterisk cannot be modified, but you can assign it to
the ASSIGN2 knob.
Each parameter can also be selected by inputting the number with the
numeric keypad.
4. Press the (PARAM) Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to
move the arrow cursor to the sensitivity area.
5. Press the (DATA) Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to
set the knob sensitivity.
Settings:
Parameters can be set between -32 and +32, for assignment
numbers 1 ~ 4.
As an example, say you have selected the Volume
parameter and set the knob sensitivity to the positive value "+32". The
volume is "0" when the knob is turned counter-clockwise to the far
left, and "127" when the knob is turned clockwise to the far right.
If the knob sensitivity is set to the negative value "-32", the volume is
"127" when the knob is turned to the far left and "0" when the knob is
turned to the far right. If the sensitivity value is small, the control range
of the knob will be narrowed and limited.
6. Repeat the above steps to set a different parameter/knob
sensitivity value to each of the four assignment numbers.
When the PARAM screen is displayed, you can select the
parameter type or change the sensivity using the Data Entry knob or
the numeric keypad.
NOTE
NOTE
# LCD
0 off
1 Volume (page 33)
2 NoteShift (page 27)
3 Detune (page 27)
4 Pan (page 34)
5 ChorusSend (page 38)
6 ReverbSend (page 38)
7 *Pitch (Oscillator Pitch)
8 VelSnsDpth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) (page 28)
9 VelSnsOfst (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) (page 28)
10 Cutoff (Filter Cuttoff Frequency) (page 34)
11 Resonance (page 34)
12 AEGAtkTime (AEG Attack Time) (page 30)
13 AEGDcyTime (AEG Decay Time) (page 30)
14 AEGSusLvl (AEG Sustain Level) (page 30)
15 AEGRelTime (AEG Release Time) (page 30)
16 LFOSpeed (LFO Speed) (page 31)
17 LFOAMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) (page 30)
18 LFOPMod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) (page 30)
19 LFOFMod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) (page 31)
20 FEGAtkTime (FEG Attack Time) (page 32)
21 FEGDcyTime (FEG Decay Time) (page 32)
22 FEGSusLvl (FEG Sustain Level) (page 32)
23 FEGRelTime (FEG Release Time) (page 32)
24 PEGInitLvl (PEG Initial Level) (page 32)
25 PEGAtkTime (PEG Attack Time) (page 32)
26 PEGAtkLvl (PEG Attack Level) (page 32)
27 PEGDcyTime (PEG Decay Time) (page 32)
28 PEGRelTime (PEG Release Time) (page 32)
29 PEGRelLvl (PEG Release Level) (page 32)
30
Settings:
ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63
DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): -64 ~ +63
REL TIME (ReleaseTime): -63 ~ +63
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator)
This sets the parameters for the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator).
The LFO is an oscillator that generates low frequency signals
used to modulate certain aspects of the sound such as pitch,
volume or filter level. There are six parameters: AMOD
(Amplitude Modulation), PMOD (Pitch Modulation), FMOD (Filter
Modulation), WAVE, SPEED and PHASE INIT.
AMOD (Amplitude Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the
volume level by applying LFO frequency modulations, to create a
tremolo effect. Larger values widen the range of the volume
change.
PMOD (Pitch Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the pitch
by applying LFO frequency modulations, to create a vibrato
effect. Larger values widen the range of the pitch change.
Amplitude Modulation Pitch Modulation
Filter Modulation Wave
Speed Phase Init
Key On Key Off
ATK TIME REL TIMEDCY TIME
SUS
LEVEL
TIME
VOLUME
Layer Edit 2 (independently applied to each Layer)
The functions in this row provide parameters which are essential
in creating a voice, such as AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator)
and LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The parameters can be set
for each Layer in a Performance.
AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator)
This sets the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator). The AEG lets
you shape how the volume level changes over time, from when
a key is hit, then released, and how the sound decays. There are
four parameters: ATK TIME (Attack Time), DCY TIME (Decay Time),
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) and REL TIME (Release Time).
Each musical instrument has a unique envelope curve
which plays an important role in determining its sound characteristics.
The AEG simulates the change of the volume envelope curve over
time.
Depending on the voice selected, changing certain
parameters may not produce a noticeable effect.
ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a
sound to reach its maximum volume level when a note is
played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a
sound to reach its Sustain Level from a maximum volume level
while the key is held.
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): Sets the Sustain Level. The volume
will be maintained at this level for as long as the key is held.
REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for a
sound to sustain after the key has been released.
Attack Time Decay Time
Sustain Level Release Time
NOTE
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
VOLUME
LFO
PEG
AEG
FEG
SUS
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
PAN
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
WAVE
DCY
TIME
REZ
SPEED
REL
TIME
POLY/
MONO
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
LAYER
31
FMOD (Filter Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the filter
cutoff frequency by applying LFO frequency modulations, to
create wah-wah type effects. Larger values widen the range of
cutoff frequency change.
WAVE: Selects the LFO frequency signal used for modulation.
You can select from the following types:
SPEED: Sets the speed of the LFO frequency modulation. Larger
values increase the speed.
PHASE INIT: Determines if the phase of the LFO frequency
modulation wave is reset or not when a note is played. There
are three types: Free, Retr (Retrigger) and Elem (Element).
Free: The wave starts at the phase position where a note is played.
TIME
KEY ON
+
0
TIME
+
0
Retr (Retrigger): The wave starts at +/-0 phase position.
Phase when
keyboard is
played
KEY ON
Elem (Element): The wave starts from the default phase position (Free or Retr) for
each element of the voices.
TIME
SLOW
FAST
TIME
TIME
Saw (Sawtooth)
Tri (Triangle)
S&HTr (Sample &
Hold = random)
*S&HTr = Adds random changes to the pitch.
(NOTE: Triangle waves will be applied for the AMOD and FMOD.
Triangle wave is applied even if you select S&HTr for PMOD, when
controlling the PMOD with the Modulation Wheel.)
ELEM (Element)
*Default settings of each element depending on the selected voice.
TIME
TIME
Settings:
AMOD (Amplitude Modulation): -31 ~ +31
PMOD (Pitch Modulation): -63 ~ +63
FMOD (Filter Modulation): -15 ~ +15
WAVE: Saw, Tri , S&HTr, Elem
SPEED: -63 ~ +63
PHASE INIT: Free, Retr, Elem
Layer Edit 3 (independently applied to each Layer)
The functions in this row provide parameters which are essential
in creating a voice, such as FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) or
PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator). The parameters can be set for
each Layer in a Performance.
FEG (Filter Envelope Generator)
This sets the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator). The FEG lets you
shape how the tone, or timbre, of the voice changes over time,
from when a key is hit, then released, and how the sound
decays. There are four parameters: ATK TIME (Attack Time), DCY
TIME (Decay Time), SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) and REL TIME
(Release Time).
Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals
within a specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x
features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below the
specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the signals
above it (see page 34). The FEG simulates the change of the filter
envelope curve over time.
Depending on the voice selected, changing certain
parameters may not produce a noticeable effect.
NOTE
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
ATK
TIME
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
DCY
TIME
VOLUME
PEGFEG
SUS
LEVEL
PAN
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
DCY
TIME
REZ
REL
TIME
POLY/
MONO
REL
LEVEL
LAYER
32
PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator)
This sets the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator). The PEG lets you
shape how the pitch of the voice changes over time, from when
a key is hit, then released, and how the sound decays. There are
six parameters: INIT LEVEL (Initial Level), ATK TIME (Attack Time),
ATK LEVEL (Attack Level), DCY TIME (Decay Time), REL TIME
(Release Time) and REL LEVEL (Release Level).
Since the PEG simulates the change of the pitch envelope
curve over time, you can create an SFX type effect and the slight pitch
change of a wind instrument.
Depending on the voice selected, changing certain
parameters may not produce a noticeable effect.
INIT LEVEL (Initial Level): Sets the initial pitch level when a key is
played.
ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a
sound to reach its Attack Level after a note is played.
ATK LEVEL (Attack Level): Sets the initially targeted level after a
note is played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a sound to
reach its basic pitch from Attack Level while the key is held.
REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for the basic
pitch to reach the Release Level after the key has been released.
REL LEVEL (Release Level): Sets the last targeted level after the
key is released.
Initial Level Attack Time
Attack Level Decay Time
Release Time Release Level
NOTE
NOTE
ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a
sound to reach its maximum cutoff frequency level when a note
is played.
DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a
sound to reach its Sustain Level from a maximum level while the
key is held.
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): Sets the Sustain Level. The cutoff
frequency will be maintained at this level for as long as the key
is held.
REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for the
cutoff frequency to reach the level preset for each voice after the
key has been released.
Settings:
ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63
DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63
SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): -64 ~ +63
REL TIME (Release Time): -63 ~ +63
Key On
CUTOFF
FREQUENCY
Key Off
ATK TIME REL TIME
DCY TIME
TIME
LEVEL
SUS
LEVEL
Attack Time Decay Time
Sustain Level Release Time
33
Settings:
INIT LEVEL (Initial Level): -64 ~ +63
ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63
ATK LEVEL (Attack Level: -64 ~ +63
DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63
REL TIME (Release Time): -63 ~ +63
REL LEVEL (Release Level): -64 ~ +63
Layer Edit 4 (independently applied to each Layer)
The functions in this row provide parameters which include
fundamental settings such as voice assignment, volume and
panning settings for each Layer. The parameters can be set for
each Layer in a Performance.
BANK
This lets you select a Bank, each of which contains up to 128
normal voices. To select a voice, you must first select a Bank
number, and then select a Program number in the PROGRAM
parameter, explained below.
Settings: off, XG000, 001, 003, 006, 008, 012, 014, 016~020, 024,
025, 027, 028, 032~043, 045, 064~072, 096~101, SFX, PRE 0~12
(for Performance only)
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
VOLUME PAN REV
SEND
CHO
SEND
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
CUTOFF
FILTER
REZ
POLY/
MONO
LAYER
UTILITY
Key On
PITCH
INIT LEVEL
ATK LEVEL
REL LEVEL
Key Off
ATK TIME REL TIME
DCY TIME
TIME
LEVEL
Basic Pitch
Each bank can be selected directly by inputting the corresponding
Bank number using the numeric keypad.
For more information about Banks and Programs (voices),
see the Voice List in the "Data List" book.
PROGRAM
This lets you select a voice, or program, from the Bank previously
selected with the BANK parameter, explained above.
Settings:
1~128
Note that the Program numbers here are 1~128 and the
MIDI Program Change numbers are 0~127. To match the MIDI
Program Change number when switching programs using an
external MIDI device, subtract a value of "1" from the Program
number.
For more information about Banks and Programs (voices),
see the Voice List in the "Data List" book.
VOLUME
This sets the volume of each Layer. It is possible to assign a
different volume setting for each Layer.
Settings:
0~127
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
MSB LSB Bank LCD Remarks
0 0 0 XG000 XG
0 1 1 XG001
0 101 101 XG101
64 0 102 SFX XG
63 0 103 PRE0 for Performance Only
63 1 104 PRE1
63 7 110 PRE7
63
63
8
12
111
115
PRE8
PRE12
- - 999 off
Bank Conversion Table for Voices Used in Performances
for Performance Only
34
The value of some Layers may forcibly be changed when
using the Variation effect.
For more information, see page 47.
FILTER
This sets the filter parameters for each Layer. There are two
parameters, CUTOFF and REZ (Resonance).
Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals
within a specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x
features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below the
specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the signals
above it.
Depending on the voice selected, changing certain
parameters may not produce a noticeable effect.
CUTOFF: Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter, or the
frequency point above which other frequencies are filtered out.
Higher settings result in brighter tones and lower settings result
in darker tones.
REZ (Resonance): Sets the amount of filter resonance or
emphasis around the cutoff frequency. Higher settings produce
a higher resonant peak, while lower settings produce a relatively
flat response.
Settings:
CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63
REZ (Resonance): -64 ~ +63
FREQUENCY
VOLUME
CUTOFF FREQUENCY
RESONANCE
FREQUENCY
VOLUME
CUTOFF FREQUENCY
FREQUENCIES CUT
FREQUENCIES PASSED
NOTE
NOTE
Cutoff Resonance
NOTE
NOTE
PAN
This sets the panning (the left or right position in the stereo
spectrum) of each Layer. Different pannings can be set for each
Layer, thus providing for a richly textured stereo image (for
stereo output).
Settings:
Random, L63 (far left in the stereo image) to L01 to C00 (center in
the stereo image) to R01 to R63 (far right in the stereo image)
When set to "Random", the pan position of each Layer will
alternate between left and right each time a Performance is played.
Some of the voices are preset and have a fixed panning of
"left" in the lower register and "right" in the higher register. In such a
case, you cannot modify the pan setting.
EFFECT
This sets the effect send (output) level of each Layer. There are
three parameters: REV SEND (Reverb Send), CHO SEND (Chorus
Send) and VARI SEND (Variation Send). Each effect send level set
here will be output to the Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effect
sections as previously selected (see page 23).
REV SEND (Reverb Send): Determines the send level of the
Reverb effect.
CHO SEND (Chorus Send): Determines the send level of the
Chorus effect.
VARI SEND (Variation Send): Enables or disables the output of
the Variation effect.
Settings:
REV SEND (Reverb Send): 0~127
CHO SEND (Chorus Send): 0~127
VARI SEND (Variation Send): OFF, ON
Reverb Send Chorus Send
Variation Send
NOTE
NOTE
35
POLY/MONO
This determines whether the voice in each Layer is played
monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to
32 notes at a time).
Generally, Polyphonic mode is selected to generate multiple
sounds at one time. There are cases, however, where it is more
effective to select Monophonic mode, such as when using a
bass sound, brass sound, or an analog synthesizer sound.
Settings:
POLY (Polyphonic), MONO (Monophonic)
You can play up to 32 notes at a time. However, the
number of notes may be reduced or truncated if you use voices which
consist of two elements and/or play a rather complicated song which
uses too many notes.
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
VOLUME PAN REV
SEND
CHO
SEND
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
CUTOFF
FILTER
REZ
POLY/
MONO
LAYER
Tips About Performance Mode
• In Performance Mode, you can use a Performance (voice)
and 12 Parts (Part 5~16) for Multi. Though the receive
channels are set in the factory as shown in the illustration,
you can change the receive channels using RCV CH (Receive
Channel) in Utility Mode.
• If a channel is selected for both Performance and one of
the Parts, the two will be played simultaneously, producing
two sounds at one time. Check the settings for the receive
channels when you play the Performance and get an
unintentional sound besides the Performance.
• In Performance Mode, you cannot modify the Multi settings
on the panel except for the receive channel setting. Use an
external MIDI device such as sequencer to modify the Multi
settings.
• You can play only one Performance at one time. It is not
possible to use the Performances as Parts for the Multi or to
configure the Layers using the Performances.
Performance
Layer 1
Layer 2
Layer 3
Layer 4
Ch. 1
Multi
Part 5
Part 6
Part 7
Ch. 5
Ch. 6
Ch. 7
Part 14
Part 15
Part 16
Ch. 14
Ch. 15
Ch. 16
MIDI Receive Channels set
at the factory
36
Editing Procedures
1. Select a Part.
Use the PART [-]/[+] button to select the Part you want to edit.
2. Select the parameter.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to
the parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter
and display the settings.
3. Set the value.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the
value. Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes
the value continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and
the [DOWN] button decreases the value.
You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data
Entry knob to change the value.
To change the value for all Parts at one time, hold SHIFT
and press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. When you press
SHIFT in Multi Part Edit, a letter "A" (All) will appear in the LCD below
the word "PART".
Other parameters will appear in the LCD when you press
the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Continue setting the
other parameters.
To exit from the Multi Part Edit, press the MULTI button
again. The display will return to the Voice name screen. You can also
exit Multi Play mode by pressing the PERFORMANCE button to enter
Performance mode.
NOTE
NOTE
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
NOTE
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
TYPE
BANK
P BEND
RANGE
NOTE
SFT
ATK
TIME
ATK
TIME
TEMPO
GG O O
LEVEL
C
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
PMOD
DETUNE
DCY
TIME
DCY
TIME
SUB
DIVIDE
VOLUME
FMOD
REV
TYPE
CUTOFF
FC PORTA
VEL ASSIGN2
LFO
PEG
CHO
TYPE
VARI
EF
VARI
TYPE
SWITCH
VARI
PARAM
TIME
VARI
DATA
MW
FMOD
LIMIT
LOW
TUNE
AEG
FEG
NOTE
DCY
LEVEL
DCY
LEVEL
PAN
CUTOFF
LIMIT
HIGH
REL
TIME
REL
TIME
REV
SEND
LIMIT
LOW
AMOD
INIT
LEVEL
CHO
SEND
LIMIT
HIGH
PMOD
ATK
TIME
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
OFFSET
FMOD
ATK
LEVEL
CUTOFF
FILTER
DEPTH
WAVE
DCY
TIME
REZ
PARAM
SPEED
REL
TIME
NAME
POLY/
MONO
ASSIGN1
PARAM
DATA
PHASE
INIT
REL
LEVEL
C
LA
ARPEGGIO
HOLD SHIFT
OCTAVE
PART/LAYER/
+
PRESET USER
PROGRAM
+
Entering Multi Play Mode
Press the MULTI button. A [] mark will appear below the
word "MULTI" in the LCD.
Playing the keyboard will play the voice of the Part currently displayed
in the LCD. The Category name for the selected voice will be shown
next to the voice name.
You can also select a voice from the XG000 (GM) Bank by pressing
the PROGRAM [-]/[+] buttons.
When you enter Multi Play mode from Performance mode,
the CS1x automatically resets the internal tone generator to XG ON
(001 Grand Piano) status.
Multi Part Edit
You can edit each Part in realtime. You can assign a voice to each Part
and set the volume, pan and effect. These settings are temporary and
cannot be stored. Therefore, entering Performance mode will clear this data.
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
Part 1-16
BANK
PROGRAM
VOLUME
PAN
EFFECT
FILTER
POLY/MONO
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
Part Number
Voice Number
Category
Program (Voice) Number
MIDI Data
PART 1~16
(1~16ch)
External
MIDI Sequencer
MULTI PART EDIT
XG voices, volume, pan,
effect and other settings.
In Multi Play mode you can play up to 16 Parts using an external MIDI sequencer. This mode is mainly used when the
CS1x is used as an XG-compatible tone generator or as a data input device in a computer music system. You can use
any XG voice from the 480 normal voices and 11 drum voices. When playing back from or recording to an external
sequencer, you can use the Multi Part Edit function to edit the volume and effect of each Part.
37
Description of Each Function
BANK
This lets you select a Bank. Various normal voice banks
containing up to 128 normal voices, a bank with different drum
voices (kits), plus SFX banks are available to choose from. To
select a voice, you must first select a Bank number, and then
select a Program number in the PROGRAM parameter,
explained below.
Settings:
off, XG000, 001, 003, 006, 008, 012, 014, 016~020, 024, 025, 027, 028,
032~043, 045, 064~072, 096~101, SFX, SFXKIT, DRUM
Each bank can be selected directly by inputting the
corresponding number with the numeric keypad.
For more information about Banks and Programs (voices),
see the XG Voice List in the "Data List" book.
PROGRAM
This lets you select a voice, or program, from the Bank
previously selected with the BANK parameter, explained above.
Settings:
1~128
Note that the Program numbers here are 1~128 and the
MIDI Program Change numbers are 0~127. When switching programs
using an external MIDI device, subtract a value of "1" from the
Program number to match the MIDI Program Change number.
For more information about Banks and Programs (voices),
see the XG Voice List in the "Data List" book.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Bank Conversion Table for Multi
MSB LSB Bank LCD
0 0 0 XG000
0 1 1 XG001
0 101 101 XG101
64 0 102 SFX
126 0 126 SFXKIT
127 0 127 DRUM
Off
--
999
It is also possible to change the Program number quickly by
using the Quick Program Change function, the same way as in
Performance mode. For details, see page 21.
Normal Voices and Drum Voices
The available voices are divided into two groups: normal voices
and drum voices. In Multi Play mode you can select and play both
normal and drum voices.
In general a "normal" voice is simply a pitched voice which can be
played on a musical scale from low to high, such as a piano or
trumpet. In Multi Play mode there are 480 XG normal voices.
A "drum" voice is a complete set of drum and other percussion
sounds, each sound having a fixed pitch. Each sound is assigned
to a specific MIDI Note number which also corresponds to a key on
a MIDI keyboard. In Multi Play mode there are 11 XG drum voices.
For a list of the drum and percussion sound assignments to each
key, see the XG Drum Voice List in the "Data List" book.
TG300B Mode
There are two tone generator modes: XG mode and TG300B
mode. Normally the CS1x plays in XG mode. However, it
automatically recognizes which mode to select based on incoming
MIDI data, i.e., through MIDI System Exclusive messages that you
can program using an external MIDI sequencer.
In TG300B mode the CS1x will play multitimbral music data created
for TG300B-compatible tone generators. TG300B mode also
provides compatibility with the GM System Level1 format.
In TG300B mode the CS1x can:
• Play up to 16 Parts.
• Choose from 579 Normal Voices and 10 Drum Voices.
VOLUME
This sets the volume of each Part. Different volume levels can be
set for each Part.
Settings:
0~127
NOTE
38
REV SEND (Reverb Send): Determines the send level of the
Reverb effect.
CHO SEND (Chorus Send): Determines the send level of the
Chorus effect.
VARI SEND (Variation Send): Enables or disables the output of
the Variation effect.
Settings:
REV SEND (Reverb Send): 0~127
CHO SEND (Chorus Send): 0~127
VARI SEND (Variation Send): OFF, ON (or 0~127)
The Variation send parameters are OFF or ON when the
Variation effect is used as the Insertion effect. They are 0~127 when
used as the System effect. Normally, the Variation effect works as an
Insertion Effect when not receiving parameter change messages to
switch to System Effect from an external MIDI sequencer. For more
information about Insertion and System effects, see page 47.
FILTER
This sets the parameters of the filter for each Part. There are two
parameters, CUTOFF and REZ (resonance).
Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals within a
specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x
features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below
the specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the
signals above it.
Depending on the voice selected, changing certain
parameters may not produce a noticeable effect.
CUTOFF: Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter, or the
frequency point above which other frequencies are filtered out.
Higher settings result in brighter sounds and lower settings
result in darker sounds.
REZ (Resonance): Sets the amount of filter resonance or
emphasis around the cutoff frequency. Higher settings produce
a higher resonant peak, while lower settings produce a relatively
flat response.
Settings:
CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63
REZ (Resonance): -64 ~ +63
NOTE
4
DEF
1
ABC
0
Cutoff Resonance
NOTE
PAN
This sets the panning (the left or right position in the stereo
spectrum) for each Part. Different pannings can be set for each
Part (for stereo output).
Settings:
Random, L63 (far left in the stereo image) to L01 to C00 (center of
a stereo image) to R01 to R63 (far right in the stereo image)
When set to "Random", the panning of each Part will
alternate between left and right each time a voice is played.
Some of the voices are preset and fixed to a panning of
"left" in the lower register and "right" in the higher register. In such a
case, you cannot modify the pan setting.
EFFECT
This sets the effect send (output) level for each Part. There are
three parameters: REV SEND (Reverb Send), CHO SEND (Chorus
Send) and VARI SEND (Variation Send). You can change the effect
send level for each effect in realtime when you are playing back
XG song data containing effect settings using an external MIDI
device.
When you enter Multi Play mode (reset to XG ON) by
pressing the MULTI button, each effect will be reset to the default
settings: Hall 1 (Reverb), Chorus 1 (Chorus) and Delay L,C,R (Variation).
In this case, the Reverb send level is set to 64, and the Chorus and
Variation send levels are set to 0.
Depending on the XG song data being played, the effect types
and their parameters used in the song may differ.
Note that the effect types and their parameters in the
Performance Edit mode have no relation to the effect settings
here.
Reverb Send Chorus Send
Variation Send
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
39
POLY/MONO
This determines whether the voice in each Layer is played
monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to
32 notes at a time).
Generally, Polyphonic mode is selected to generate multiple
sounds at one time. There are cases, however,where it is more
effective to select Monophonic mode, such as when using a
bass sound, brass sound, or an analog synthesizer sound.
Settings:
POLY (Polyphonic), MONO (Monophonic)
You can play up to 32 notes at a time. However, the
number of notes may be reduced or truncated if you use voices which
consist of two elements and/or play a rather complicated song which
uses too many notes.
Using the Multi Play Mode
• Multi Play Mode is specifically aimed at playing CS1x as a
tone generator using the external device such as sequencer.
Consequently, the changes made in Multi Play Mode are
temporary and cannot be stored.
• The Arpeggiator function is not available in Multi Play
Mode. It can only be applied to the Performances in
Performance Mode.
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN
VOLUME PAN REV
SEND
CHO
SEND
EFFECT
VARI
SEND
CUTOFF
FILTER
REZ
POLY/
MONO
U
40
Other parameters will appear in the LCD when you press
the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Continue setting the
other parameters.
Press the PERFORMANCE button or the MULTI button to exit
Utility mode and return to each respective mode.
It is not necessary to store changes made in the Utility
mode. The CS1x will remember any changes you make in this mode.
Description of Each Function
SYSTEM
This sets the tuning and other keyboard settings for the CS1x
tone generator. There are four parameters: MASTER TUNE, KBD
TRANS (Keyboard Transpose), VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) and
VEL FIX (Velocity Fix).
MASTER TUNE
This tunes the CS1x's tone generator. Basic pitch is 440 Hz at
note A3. Master tuning can be adjusted 1 Hz at a time.
Settings:
-102 Hz to 0 (A3=440 Hz) to +102 Hz
KBD TRANS (Keyboard Transpose)
This lets you transpose the pitch in semitones. The transpose
value will also be reflected in the Octave Shift function on the
panel.
Settings:
-36 to 0 (standard) to +36
This function setting is related to OCTAVE SHIFT on the
panel, the indication may be changed after using the OCTAVE SHIFT
function.
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Entering Utility Mode
Press the UTILITY button. A [] mark appears in the LCD
below the word "UTILITY".
The LCD will display the parameter settings previously
selected in Utility mode. The first time you press the UTILITY button
after turning the power on, the LCD will display the first page (Master
Tune) in Utility mode.
Procedure
1. Select the parameter.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to the
parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter and display
the settings in the LCD.
2. Set the value.
Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the value.
Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes the value
continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and the [DOWN]
button decreases the value.
You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data
Entry knob to change the value.
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI
TIME
KBD
TRANS
VOLUME
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
BANK
TIME
MASTER
TUNE
PROGRAM
SYSTEM MIDI
TIME
KBD
TRANS
VOLUME
LEVEL
VEL
CURVE
PAN
TIME
VEL
FIX
REV
SEND
LEVEL
TRANS
CH
CHO
SEND
TIME
EFFECT
RCV
CH
VARI
SEND
LEVEL
DEVICE
NO
NOTE
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
Parameter Name
SYSTEM SETTINGS
MASTER TUNE
KBD TRANS
VEL CURVE
VEL FIX
MIDI SETTINGS
TRANS CH
RCV CH
DEVICE NO
LOCAL
BULK DUMP
CS1x
CS1x
MIDI
ASSIGN CONTROL
CHANGER NUMBER
In Utility mode you can set the CS1x system and MIDI parameters.
41
VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve)
The velocity curve set here determines the way the CS1x's tone
generator responds to playing velocity when the VEL FIX parameter (see
below) is set to OFF. The following six types of curves are available:
Norm (Normal): The velocity is in proportion to the strength (how
hard you play the keyboard).
Soft1: This curve is designed to increase the volume level with a softer
playing style. This is suitable for people with a soft key touch.
Soft2: This curve is also designed to increase the volume level with a
softer playing style. This is close to Normal compared with Soft1.
Easy: In general, this curve is also designed to increase the volume level with
a softer playing style. However, the volume level is stable in all registers since
the velocity curve in the mid range is close to Normal.
Wide: This curve is designed to lower the volume level with a softer
playing style and increase the volume level with a stronger playing
style. As a result, you feel a wider dynamic range.
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
Hard: This curve is designed to increase the volume level with a
stronger playing style. This is suitable for people with a strong
key touch.
Settings:
Norm, Soft1, Soft2, Easy, Wide, Hard
VEL FIX (Velocity Fix)
This sets the velocity of the CS1x keyboard to a specific value.
This is used when you want to play the sound at a fixed velocity
regardless of keyboard touch.
Settings:
1 ~ 127, off
Set the parameter in VEL FIX to OFF to enable the velocity
curve previously selected in the VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) parameter.
MIDI
The MIDI parameters let you exchange MIDI data between the
CS1x and an external MIDI device. There are five parameters:
TRANS CH (Transmit Channel), RCV (Receive Channel), DEVICE
NO (Device Number), LOCAL (Local On/Off) and BULK DUMP
(Performance Bulk Dump).
TRANS CH (Transmit Channel)
This sets the MIDI transmit channel from the CS1x to an external
MIDI device such as a sequencer.
Settings:
1~16ch (channel)
You can use the CS1x to play and control an external MIDI
device. For details, see page 9.
NOTE
NOTE
KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH
VOLUME
42
BULK DUMP (Performance Bulk Dump)
This lets you send Performance data from the CS1x in bulk to
another CS1x or to the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2. This is
convenient for backing up, storing, or managing your important
Performance data.
To enable transmission, first connect the MIDI devices. (For
details about setting up each device, see the respective owner's
manuals of the external MIDI devices.) It is necessary to match the
device number of the CS1x with the device number of the external
MIDI device. (See the DEVICE NO parameter, above.)
Bulk Dump Send
1.Select the type of data you want to send by pressing the
Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. You can select from the
following types:
1Perf: The Preset or User Performance data currently selected in
Performance mode.
all: All of the User Performance data and the System data.
2.Press the ENTER/YES button to execute the bulk dump
operation. "End" will appear in the LCD when the operation is
completed, and the LCD will return to the original display.
Bulk Dump Receive
This lets you retrieve CS1x Performance data from an external
device, loading it back into the CS1x in bulk.
The data that can be received will differ depending on the mode.
For details about the MIDI data format, see the "Data List" book.
It is necessary to match the device number of the CS1x with the
device number of the external MIDI device. (See the DEVICE NO
parameter, above.)
VWX
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
NOTE
RCV CH (Receive Channel)
In Performance Mode, this sets the MIDI receive channel for
controlling the CS1x with an external device such as a MIDI
sequencer or computer.
In Multi Play mode, the CS1x resets the internal tone generator to
XG ON (001 Grand Piano) status and automatically receives the
external data.
Settings:
LAYER A (Layer All for a Performance) = 1~16ch, Part 5~16 = 1~16, off
In Performance Mode, the receive channels can be used for
a Performance and 12 Parts (Part 5~16) for Multi. However, you cannot
use the Insertion effect for Parts 5~16.
DEVICE NO (Device Number)
This sets the MIDI device number. When transmitting or receiving
system exclusive messages such as bulk dump or parameter
change messages with an external MIDI device, you must match
the device numbers for both the CS1x and the external device.
Settings:
1~16, all, off
LOCAL (Local On/Off)
This determines whether the keyboard is connected to the CS1x's
internal tone generator. When Local is set to OFF, the keyboard is
disconnected from the tone generator. The internal tone
generator will not respond to the keyboard (no sound will be
produced), but it will respond to incoming MIDI data from an
external device. However, the keyboard still transmits MIDI
messages from the MIDI OUT jack.
For normal play, local should be set to ON.
Settings:
on, off
EXTERNAL MIDI DEVICE
MIDI OUT
MIDI IN
MIDI IN
MIDI OUT
LOCAL OFF
TONE
GENERATOR
KEYBOARD
NOTE
43
ASSIGN CTRL NO (Assign Control Change Number)
This lets you assign Control Change Numbers to controllers such
as the Modulation Wheel or Sound Control Knobs. This is mainly
used to control external devices connected via MIDI.
The main function of the Sound Control Knobs will not be
changed.
You can designate whether the Modulation Wheel or the Foot
Controller is used for Scene Control (page 16).
Following are the Control Change Numbers and Names that can
be assigned to the various controllers:
In the Scene Control settings, you can choose from Mod.
Wheel (Modulation Wheel) or FootCtrl (Foot Controller).
General Purpose: With the CS1x, General Purpose 1 is for FC,
2 for knob 3 (ASSIGN1), 3 for knob 6 (ASSIGN2) and 4 for no setting.
NOTE
Control Change Number Name LCD
1 Modulation Wheel Mod.Whl
5 Portament Time PortaTm
6 Data Entry MSB DataMSB
7 Main Volume MainVol
10 Panpot Panpot
11 Expression Expres.
16 General purpose1 Generl1
17 General purpose2 Generl2
18 General purpose3 Generl3
19 General purpose4 Generl4
38 Data Entry LSB DataLSB
64 Hold 1(Damper/Sustain) Hold1
65 Portament Switch PortaSW
66 Sostenute Sostnut
67 Soft Pedal Soft
71 Harmonic Contents Harmonic
72 Release Time RelTime
73 Attack Time AtkTime
74 Brightness Bright.
84 Portament Control PortaCt
91 Reverb Depth Reverb
93 Chorus Depth Chorus
94 Variation Depth Vari
Others ------- -------
Assignable Control Change Numbers and Names
Scene
SCENE 1 or 2 buttons (only for the Scene Control)
NOTE
Controller LCD
Modulation Wheel MW
Sound Control Knob 1 (ATTACK) Knob1
Sound Control Knob 2 (RELEASE) Knob2
Sound Control Knob 3 (ASSIGN 1/DATA) Knob3
Sound Control Knob 4 (CUTOFF) Knob4
Sound Control Knob 5 (RESONANCE) Knob5
Sound Control Knob 6 (ASSIGN 2) Knob6
Footswitch connected to the FOOTSWITCH jack on the rear panel FS
Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel FC
Foot Volume pedal connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack on the rear panel FV
Control Change Number Name
Controller
NOTE
Assigning the Controllers
1.Move the controller on the panel to which the Control Change
Number is to be assigned. The parameters of the controller
will appear in the LCD.
Press the SCENE1 or SCENE 2 button to display the Scene
Control parameters.
2.Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to select the
Control Change Number and Name.
3.Repeat steps 1 and 2 to assign the Control Change Numbers
and Names to each controller.
This function is convenient for controlling an external MIDI
device with the CS1x. For details, see page 53.
Tips About the Sound Control Knobs
The changes made by the Sound Control Knobs can be output as
the MIDI messages.
The MIDI messages output via MIDI OUT can be assigned using the
ASSIGN CTRL NO function shown at the left.
The assignments set at the factory:
Sound Control Knob 1 73: Attack Time
Sound Control Knob 2 72: Release Time
Sound Control Knob 3 17: General purpose2
Sound Control Knob 4 74: Brightness
Sound Control Knob 5 71: Harmonic Contents
Sound Control Knob 6 18: General purpose3
• When the CS1x receives the data assigned to each Knob from an
external MIDI device, the parameter printed on the panel for the
Knob will be affected. For example, the Attack Time will be affected,
when the Brightness (74) is assigned to the Knob 1 and the Attack
Time (73) is assigned to the Knob 3, and then the message for the
Brightness (74) are transmitted from an external device.
• Both data assigned to the Knob using the ASSIGN CTRL NO
function and Knob data which parameter name is printed on the
panel are sent to the internal tone generator when turning the
Knob. For example, both Brightness (74) and Attack Time will be
affected when the Brightness (74) is assigned to the Knob 1 and the
Knob 1 is turned.
NOTE
NOTE
44
3. Press the ENTER/YES button. “Sure?” will appear in the LCD.
To audition the sound, simply play the keyboard.
4. Press the YES/ENTER button again to execute the storing
operation. The display will return to the Performance Play
mode screen after the data is stored.
Press the NO button to cancel the storing operation.
Pressing the PERFORMANCE button exits Store mode.
When storing a Performace, the position of each Sound Control Knob will
also be stored. Therefore, when selecting the stored User Performance in
Performance Play mode, the CS1x will produce the sound affected by
each Sound Control Knob position at that time. (Turning the Knob will
restore the sound with the current Sound Control Knob positions.)
Storing a Scene
There are two "Scene" memories dedicated to each
Performance. This function is used to assign a Scene, or the
position of the six Sound Control Knobs, to the SCENE 1 or
SCENE 2 button. This is convenient for live performances or
recording sessions, since it lets you access a particular setting
simply by pressing a button.
Two Scenes can be stored in each Performance.
Once you have stored a Scene to the edit buffer (temporary
save), to store the Scene data permanently you must perform the
Performance store operation, above. (Before executing the Performance
Store operation to record the Scene as a part of the performance, turn all
the sound control knobs to their center positions.) Otherwise, you will lose
the Scene settings if you select another Performance or enter Multi Play
mode.
NOTE
NOTE
VWX
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
You cannot enter Store mode from Multi Play mode or
Utility mode.
Storing a Performance
1. After editing a performance, press the STORE button to enter
Store mode.
2. Select the User Performance number in which you want to
store the Performance, using the numeric keypad (0~9),
PROGRAM [-]/[+] buttons, or Data Entry knob.
If you write over an existing User Performance, the data
previously stored there will be lost. To be safe, always store your
important data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data
Filer MDF2. If you want, you can reset the User Performances back to
the original factory settings. For details, see Factory Settings
, page 46.
To rename the Performance, select the Performance Name
parameter in Performance Edit mode (see page 24).
NOTE
ERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
Preset Performance
1~128
PERFORMANCE STORE
User Performance
1~128
Edited Performance
Store Destination
STORE
SCENE STORE
Scene 1
Memory
6 Knob Position Scene 1/2
NOTE
In Store mode you can store edited Performances or Scenes in the CS1x's internal memory. To enter Store Mode, you
must first be in Performance Mode.
45
1. Set each Sound Control Knob to your preference.
2. Hold STORE and press the SCENE 1 button to store the current
Sound Control Knob settings to the SCENE 1 button memory.
To store another set of Sound Control Knob settings, hold
STORE and press the SCENE 2 button.
The following message will appear in the LCD when the Scene is stored
to the edit buffer.
Example: Settings stored to the SCENE 1 button.
3. Store the Scene to the currently selected Performance using
the Performance store operation.
PERFORMANCE MULTI
DEMO
STORE UTILITY
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
ATTACK
AMP EG
RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA
CUTOFF
FILTER
RESONANCE ASSIGN 2
Selecting a Scene
First select the Performance to which you have stored a Scene.
Then press the SCENE 1 or SCENE 2 button to select the Scene. The
LED by the button will light to indicate that you have activated the
Scene settings.
Each Sound Control Knob will be disabled when a Scene is
selected, and you will not be able to change the parameters using
the knobs.
You can use the Modulation Wheel or Foot Controller to change the
parameters (Scene settings) continuously between the SCENE 1 and
SCENE 2 settings in realtime. The minimum position of the
controller is Scene1, and the maximum postion is Scene 2. For
details about which controller is used to change between two
Scenes, see page 43.
2
MW/FC
1
SCENE
MODULATION
SCENE 2
SCENE 1
Changes continuously between
SCENE 1 and SCENE 2
46
Executing this function will replace all of your existing data.
As such, always store your important data to an external device such
as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2 beforehand.
Turn the power of the CS1x off, then, while holding the 7, 8, and 9 keys
on the numeric keypad, turn the power back on.
VWX
7
YZ'
8
&
*
9
MNO
4
PQR
5
STU
6
DEF
1
GHI
2
JKL
NO/
QUICK PC
YES
3
ABC
0
SPACE
ENTER
ON OFF
NOTE
You can reset all of the settings in the CS1x (Performance, Scene, System and MIDI settings) to the original factory
(initial) settings.
47
Type 1: Reverb
Reverb recreates the sounds of various environments by adding room
ambiance through delays or reflections. There are 11 Reverb types to
choose from. (See page 49.)
Type 2: Chorus
Chorus creates a variety of rich, spacious-sounding effects which are
especially dramatic in stereo. There are 11 Chorus effect types, including
Chorus and Flanger. (See page 49.)
Type 3: Variation
Variation is a special section of various effects including Reverb and
Chorus, plus many others not found in the other sections, such as
Distortion, Wah, and Auto Pan. There are 43 Variation effect types. (See
page 49.)
System and Insertion Effects
The CS1x effects sections can be designated as either System or Insertion
effects. Reverb and Chorus are always System effects, which means they
can be applied to any or all Parts. The Variation effect can also be a
System effect, or it can be designated as an Insertion effect, which means
it can be dedicated to a specific Part.
Basically, CS1x System and Insertion effects work the same way as in a
sound mixer, as shown in the diagram at right. For example, System
effects can be applied to musical instruments (i.e., Parts) which are
connected to the various mixer channels; the amount of each System
effect is determined by channel "send" and system "return" level controls.
An Insertion effect can be connected ("inserted") into the signal flow of a
specific channel in order to process the sound of that instrument (i.e.,
Layer/Part) only.
With the CS1x, in Performance mode the Insertion effect (Variation) can be
applied to one or more of the four Layers, while in Multi Play mode it can
only be applied to a single Part.
The System and Insertion effect configurations can be controlled in detail
by XG song data (signified by the XG mark) when the CS1x is in Multi Play
mode.
Performance Mode
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the
CS1x is in Performance mode. In this case the Variation effect is fixed as
the Insertion effect.
The Variation Send On/Off switch
! determines which Layers the
Variation effect is applied to. The Performance Layer Edit 4 menu EFFECT
VARI SEND parameter turns the Variation effect ON/OFF for each Layer
(see page 34).
The Variation effect wet/dry balance " determines the ratio of effected
(wet) signal to original (dry) signal. The resulting Variation effect signal is
then sent to the Reverb effect via the Reverb send control #, and to the
Chorus effect via the Chorus send control $; the Send Chorus To Reverb
signal % can be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 knob. The Performance Layer
Edit 4 menu EFFECT REV SEND & and CHO SEND ' parameters determine
the respective Reverb and Chorus send levels applied to each Layer (see
page 34). Layers which are switched off !, as well as Parts 5~16, can still
have System Reverb and Chorus effects applied to them.
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
L4
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
14 1512 L116 L3L2
Multi Play Mode
Part 1-16
Performance Mode
Layer 1-4
SYSTEM EFFECT
Reverb Effect
Chorus Effect
Variation Effect
Can be used as either System
or Insertion effect.
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
100
LEVEL
Insertion Effect Insertion Effect
The CS1x features three independent digital effects units, Reverb, Chorus and Variation, which can be applied to the
voices in a variety of ways to provide a wide range of sound processing capabilities.
In Performance mode you can choose the Reverb, Chorus and Variation effect types, as well as set additional
parameters for the Variation effect. In Multi Play mode, system exclusive (MIDI) data programmed in a song sequence
(of an external sequencer or computer) can change the various CS1x effect parameters at specific points in the song to
greatly enhance the sound and impact of the playback.
48
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the
CS1x is in Multi Play mode and the Variation effect is designated as a
System effect.
Each of the 16 Parts has a Dry send ! level which controls the amount of
original signal for each Part (page 38). Reverb send ", Chorus send #,
and Variation send $ levels control the amount of effect applied to each
Part, determined by the Multi Edit EFFECT REV SEND, CHO SEND and VARI
SEND parameters (between 0~127), respectively (page 38). Reverb return
%, Chorus return & and Variation return ' levels can also be controlled
to determine the amount of each effect applied (page 38).
The Send Chorus to Reverb ( level is sent from the Chorus effect to the
Reverb effect (page 38). The Send Variation to Reverb ) and Send
Variation to Chorus * levels are sent from the Variation effect to the
Reverb and Chorus effects, respectively (page 38). These three
parameters let you make series and parallel effect configurations which
provide enormous sound enhancement flexibility.
If you select Effect Off in the Variation Type menu, the
Layers which have the VARI SEND function set to ON will not sound.
When you don't want to use the Variation Effect on the Layers, set the
VARI TYPE to Thru.
NOTE
Part 1
Part 2
Part 16
Rev
Cho
Vari
Rev Return Level
Cho Return
Vari Return
Vari to Rev
Vari to Cho
Cho to Rev
Dry Send
Rev Send Cho Send Vari Send
Vari Send, Cho Send, Rev Send = 0~127
•XG effect set to System
Out
!
"#$
%
&
'
(
)
*
Part 1
Part 2
Part 3
Part 16
wet/dry
MULTI
Send Cho to Rev
Rev Return Level
Cho Return Level
Cho SendRev Send
Rev
•XG effect set to Insertion
•Part 3 VARI SEND set to ON
Cho
Out
Vari
"#
%
&
$
!
Reverb and Chorus send levels for Layers with the Variation
Send On/Off switch set to ON are determined by the highest
numbered Layer. For example, if Layers 1, 2 and 3 are switched on,
then the Reverb and Chorus send level for Layer 3 will determine the
amount of effect applied to each Layer.
In Performance mode effect send levels for Parts 5~16 (as
well as Layers 1~4) can be controlled by an external MIDI sequencer.
The Variation effect cannot be applied to Parts 5~16.
Multi Play Mode
The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the
CS1x is in Multi Play mode and the Variation effect is designated as an
Insertion effect.
In Multi Play mode the various effect settings can be
controlled by MIDI system exclusive Parameter Change messages
(received from an external sequencer or computer). The illustrations at
right show the Reverb, Chorus and Variation send parameters which
can be controlled from the CS1x panel. For details about the others,
refer to each page number as listed in the following explanation.
When the CS1x is in Multi Play mode, the Variation Effect is
automatically reset as an Insertion Effect. If you want to set the
Variation Effect as a System Effect, you need to send a parameter
change message to the CS1x from an external MIDI sequencer.
The Variation (Insertion) effect can be applied to any one of the 16 Parts at
a time, designated by switching the Multi Edit EFFECT VARI SEND
parameter to ON (page 38). The ratio of Variation effect (wet) signal to
original (dry) signal is determined by the wet/dry balance !, which in
turn controls the amount of Variation effect signal applied to the Part
(page 38).
Although only one Part at a time can have the Variation effect applied to
it, all Parts, including the Part with Variation effect, can have Reverb and
Chorus applied, determined by the Reverb send " and Chorus send #
level settings (between 0~127) of the Multi Edit EFFECT REV SEND and CHO
SEND parameters, respectively (page 38). Reverb return $ and Chorus
return % levels can also be controlled to determine the amount of each
effect applied. The Send Chorus to Reverb & level from the Chorus effect
to the Reverb effect can also be controlled in a series, if you assign it to
the ASSIGN 1 knob (page 26); in this case, the Chorus return % level
should be set to "0".
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
NOTE
Layer 1
on
PERFORMANCE
Layer 2
on
Layer 3
on
Layer 4
off
wet/dry
Part 5
Part 16
Cho
Rev
Cho Send
Cho Send
Rev Send
Rev Send
Out
Knobl (Cho to Rev)
(for each layer/part)
(for each layer/part)
!
!
!
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
Vari
49
Effect Type List
Reverb Types
Following are descriptions of the Reverb types.
Chorus Types
Following are descriptions of the Chorus types.
Variation Types
When the effect type is set to Effect OFF while the Insertion
effect is used, no sound is output. If you don't want to use the
Variation effect, select Thru to pass the signal through the Variation
effect without applying any effect.
Following are descriptions of the Variation types.
Effect Parameter List
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3 ,STAGE1,STAGE2 ,PLATE
1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4
2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
3 Initial Delay 0.1~99.3ms 0-63 table#5
4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3
5 LPF Cutoff 1.0kHz~Thru 34-60 table#3
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 Er/ Rev Balance E63> R~ E=R ~ E<R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
16
No.
Exclusive
Effect Type Description
MSB LSB
0 0 0 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
1 1 0 HALL1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
2 1 1 HALL2
3 2 0 ROOM1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
4 2 1 ROOM2
5 2 2 ROOM3
6 3 0 STAGE1 Reverb approproate for a solo instrument.
Reverb approproate for a solo instrument.
7 3 1 STAGE2
8 4 0 PLATE Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
9 5 0 DELAY L,C,R A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center).
10 6 0 DELAY L,R A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided.
11 7 0 ECHO Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R.
12 8 0 CROSS DELAY A program that crosses the feedback of two delays.
13 9 0 ER1 An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb.
14 9 1 ER2
15 A 0 GATE REVERB A simulation of gated reverb.
16 B 0 REVERSE GATE A program that simulates gated reverb played backwords.
17 14 0 KARAOKE 1 A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb.
A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb.
18 14 1 KARAOKE 2
19 14 2 KARAOKE 3
20 41 0 CHORUS1 A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness.
A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness.
A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness.
21 41 1 CHORUS2
22 41 2 CHORUS3
23 41 8 CHORUS4 Chorus with stereo input.
24 42 0 CELESTE1 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 4-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 5-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
25 42 1 CELESTE2
26 42 2 CELESTE3
27 42 8 CELESTE4 Chorus with stereo input.
28 43 0 FLANGER1 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
29 43 1 FLANGER2
30 43 8 FLANGER3
31 44 0 SYMPHONIC A multi-phase version of CELESTE.
32 45 0 ROTARY SPEAKER A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use an AC1 (assignable controller) etc.
to controll the speed of rotation.
33 46 0 TREMOLO An effect that cyclically modulates the volume.
34 47 0 AUTO PAN A program that cyclically moves the sound image to left and right, front and back.
35 48 0 PHASER1 Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound.
36 48 8 PHASER2 Phaser with stereo input.
37 49 0 DISTORTION Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound.
38 4A 0 OVER DRIVE Adds mild distortion ti the sound.
39 4B 0 AMP SIMULATOR A simulation of a guitar amp.
40 4C 0 3BAND EQ (MONO) A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing.
41 4D 0 2BAND EQ (STEREO) A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts.
42 4E 0 AUTO WAH (LFO) Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah.
43
*MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal. *LSB = 0 is the basic effect type.
40 0 THRU Bypass without applying an effect.
NOTE
No.
Exclusive
Effect Type Description
MSB LSB
0 0 0 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
1 41 0 CHORUS1 Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness.
2 41 1 CHORUS2
3 41 2 CHORUS3
4 41 8 CHORUS4 Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound.
5 42 0 CELESTE1 A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound.
6 42 1 CELESTE2
7 42 2 CELESTE3
8 42 8 CELESTE4 CELESTE with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will apply to the effect sound.
9 43 0 FLANGER1 Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound.
10 43 1 FLANGER2
11 42 8 FLANGER3
No.
Exclusive
Effect Type Description
MSB LSB
0 0 0 NO EFFECT Effect turned off.
1 1 0 HALL1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall.
2 1 1 HALL2
3 2 0 ROOM1 Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
Reverb simulating the resonance of a room.
4 2 1 ROOM2
5 2 2 ROOM3
6 3 0 STAGE1 Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument.
7 3 1 STAGE2
8 4 0 PLATE Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit.
9 10 0 WHITE ROOM A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay.
10 11 0 TUNNEL Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right.
11 13 0 BASEMENT A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance.
The parameter depth marked with a can be controlled
by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly
assigned.
The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix
numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data
List" book.
NOTE
1 L->R Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
2 R->L Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0-2
5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
CROSS DELAY
1 Lch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
2 Lch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
3 Rch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
4 Rch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
6 Lch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
7 Rch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550
8 Delay2 Level 0~127 0-127
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
ECHO
1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
DELAY L,R
1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
3 Cch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 Cch Level 0~127 0-127
7 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
DELAY L,C,R
1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 table#4
2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 table#3
5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
6 Width 0.5~10.2m 0-37 table#8
7 Heigt 0.5~20.2m 0-73 table#8
8 Depth 0.5~30.2m 0-104 table#8
9 Wall Vary 0~30 0-30
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 table#5
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 Er/ Rev Balance E63> R~ E=R ~ E<R63 1-127
14
15 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
WHITE ROOM ,TUNNEL, BASEMENT
50
The parameter depth marked with a can be controlled
by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly
assigned.
The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix
numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data
List" book.
NOTE
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Phase Shift Offset 0~127 0-127
4 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Stage 6~10(phaser1) / 3~5(phaser2) 3-10
12 Diffusion Mono/Stereo 0-1
13
LFO Phase Difference
-180~+180deg. 4-124 Phaser2
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
PHASER1, PHASER2
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 L/R Depth 0~127 0-127
3 F/R Depth 0~127 0-127
4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0-5
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
AUTO PAN
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 AM Depth 0~127 0-127
3 PM Depth 0~127 0-127
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10
11
12
13
14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 4-124
resolution=3deg.
15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
TREMOLO
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
ROTARY SPEAKER
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Delay Offset 0.0~50.0ms 0-127 table#2
4
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
SYMPHONIC
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Delay Offset 0.0~6.3ms 0-63 table#2
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 4-124
resolution=3deg.
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
FLANGER1,FLANGER2,FLANGER3
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO PM Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
4 Delay Offset 0.0~50.0ms 0-127 table#2
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4
1 Delay Time 0~400.0ms 0-127 table#7
2 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
3 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
KARAOKE1,2,3
1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0-1
2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6
3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
4 Initial Delay 0.1~99.3ms 0-63 table#5
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Liveness 0~10 0-10
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
GATE REVERB,REVERSE GATE
1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0-5
2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 table#6
3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10
4 Initial Delay 0.1~99.3ms 0-63 table#5
5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127
6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52
7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Liveness 0~10 0-10
12 Density 0~3 0-3
13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2
51
The parameter depth marked with a can be controlled
by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly
assigned.
The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix
numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data
List" book.
NOTE
1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1
2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127
3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 50Hz~14.0kHz 0-127 table#9
4 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120
5
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
AUTO WAH
1 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
2 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
4 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
STEREO EQ(2-BAND)
1 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
2 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 28-54 table#3
3 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120
5 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 table#3
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
MONO EQ(3-BAND)
1 Drive 0~127 0-127
2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3
3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
4 Output Level 0~127 0-127
5
6
7
8
9
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 mild~sharp
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR
1 Drive 0~127 0-127
2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3
3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 table#3
5 Output Level 0~127 0-127
6
7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 28-54 table#3
8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76
9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120
10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127
11 Edge(Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 mild~sharp
12
13
14
15
16
No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control
DISTORTION,OVERDRIVE
Effect Data Assign Table
Data Value
EQ Frequency
Table#3
Data Value
0 THRU(20)
122
225
328
432
536
640
745
850
956
10 63
11 70
12 80
13 90
14 100
15 110
16 125
17 140
18 160
19 180
20 200
21 225
22 250
23 280
24 315
25 355
26 400
27 450
28 500
29 560
30 630
31 700
32 800
33 900
34 1.0k
35 1.1k
36 1.2k
37 1.4k
38 1.6k
39 1.8k
40 2.0k
41 2.2k
42 2.5k
43 2.8k
44 3.2k
45 3.6k
46 4.0k
47 4.5k
48 5.0k
49 5.6k
50 6.3k
51 7.0k
52 8.0k
53 9.0k
54 10.0k
55 11.0k
56 12.0k
57 14.0k
58 16.0k
59 18.0k
60
THRU(20.0k)
Data Value
Modulation Delay Offset
Table#2
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.0
1 0.1
2 0.2
3 0.3
4 0.4
5 0.5
6 0.6
7 0.7
8 0.8
9 0.9
10 1.0
11 1.1
12 1.2
13 1.3
14 1.4
15 1.5
16 1.6
17 1.7
18 1.8
19 1.9
20 2.0
21 2.1
22 2.2
23 2.3
24 2.4
25 2.5
26 2.6
27 2.7
28 2.8
29 2.9
30 3.0
31 3.1
32 3.2
33 3.3
34 3.4
35 3.5
36 3.6
37 3.7
38 3.8
39 3.9
40 4.0
41 4.1
42 4.2
43 4.3
44 4.4
45 4.5
46 4.6
47 4.7
48 4.8
49 4.9
50 5.0
51 5.1
52 5.2
53 5.3
54 5.4
55 5.5
56 5.6
57 5.7
58 5.8
59 5.9
60 6.0
61 6.1
62 6.2
63 6.3
64 6.4
65 6.5
66 6.6
67 6.7
68 6.8
69 6.9
70 7.0
71 7.1
72 7.2
73 7.3
74 7.4
75 7.5
76 7.6
77 7.7
78 7.8
79 7.9
80 8.0
81 8.1
82 8.2
83 8.3
84 8.4
85 8.5
86 8.6
87 8.7
88 8.8
89 8.9
90 9.0
91 9.1
92 9.2
93 9.3
94 9.4
95 9.5
96 9.6
97 9.7
98 9.8
99 9.9
100 10.0
101 11.1
102 12.2
103 13.3
104 14.4
105 15.5
106 17.1
107 18.6
108 20.2
109 21.8
110 23.3
111 24.9
112 26.5
113 28.0
114 29.6
115 31.2
116 32.8
117 34.3
118 35.9
119 37.5
120 39.0
121 40.6
122 42.2
123 43.7
124 45.3
125 46.9
126 48.4
127 50.0
Data Value
LFO Frequency
Table#1
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.00
1 0.04
2 0.08
3 0.13
4 0.17
5 0.21
6 0.25
7 0.29
8 0.34
9 0.38
10 0.42
11 0.46
12 0.51
13 0.55
14 0.59
15 0.63
16 0.67
17 0.72
18 0.76
19 0.80
20 0.84
21 0.88
22 0.93
23 0.97
24 1.01
25 1.05
26 1.09
27 1.14
28 1.18
29 1.22
30 1.26
31 1.30
32 1.35
33 1.39
34 1.43
35 1.47
36 1.51
37 1.56
38 1.60
39 1.64
40 1.68
41 1.72
42 1.77
43 1.81
44 1.85
45 1.89
46 1.94
47 1.98
48 2.02
49 2.06
50 2.10
51 2.15
52 2.19
53 2.23
54 2.27
55 2.31
56 2.36
57 2.40
58 2.44
59 2.48
60 2.52
61 2.57
62 2.61
63 2.65
64 2.69
65 2.78
66 2.86
67 2.94
68 3.03
69 3.11
70 3.20
71 3.28
72 3.37
73 3.45
74 3.53
75 3.62
76 3.70
77 3.87
78 4.04
79 4.21
80 4.37
81 4.54
82 4.71
83 4.88
84 5.05
85 5.22
86 5.38
87 5.55
88 5.72
89 6.06
90 6.39
91 6.73
92 7.07
93 7.40
94 7.74
95 8.08
96 8.41
97 8.75
98 9.08
99 9.42
100 9.76
101 10.10
102 10.80
103 11.40
104 12.10
105 12.80
106 13.50
107 14.10
108 14.80
109 15.50
110 16.20
111 16.80
112 17.50
113 18.20
114 19.50
115 20.90
116 22.20
117 23.60
118 24.90
119 26.20
120 27.60
121 28.90
122 30.30
123 31.60
124 33.00
125 34.30
126 37.00
127 39.70
52
Cutoff Frequency Offset
Table#9
Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value
050
155
260
366
472
580
686
794
8 100
9110
10 120
11 130
12 140
13 150
14 162
15 174
16 186
17 200
18 215
19 230
20 245
21 260
22 280
23 300
24 315
25 335
26 355
27 380
28 400
29 425
30 450
31 475
32 500
33 530
34 560
35 590
36 620
37 650
38 680
39 720
40 760
41 800
42 840
43 880
44 920
45 960
46 1.00k
47 1.05k
48 1.10k
49 1.15k
50 1.20k
51 1.26k
52 1.32k
53 1.38k
54 1.43k
55 1.50k
56 1.56k
57 1.62k
58 1.69k
59 1.76k
60 1.83k
61 1.90k
62 1.98k
63 2.06k
64 2.14k
65 2.22k
66 2.31k
67 2.40k
68 2.49k
69 2.58k
70 2.67k
71 2.77k
72 2.87k
73 2.97k
74 3.08k
75 3.19k
76 3.30k
77 3.41k
78 3.53k
79 3.65k
80 3.77k
81 3.90k
82 4.03k
83 4.16k
84 4.29k
85 4.43k
86 4.57k
87 4.72k
88 4.87k
89 5.02k
90 5.18k
91 5.34k
92 5.50k
93 5.67k
94 5.84k
95 6.02k
96 6.20k
97 6.38k
98 6.56k
99 6.75k
100 6.95k
101 7.15k
102 7.35k
103 7.56k
104 7.78k
105 8.00k
106 8.22k
107 8.44k
108 8.67k
109 8.90k
110 9.14k
111 9.38k
112 9.63k
113 9.90k
114 10.2k
115 10.4k
116 10.7k
117 10.9k
118 11.2k
119 11.5k
120 11.8k
121 12.1k
122 12.4k
123 12.7k
124 13.0k
125 13.3k
126 13.7k
127 14.0k
Data Value
Reverb Width;Depth;Height
Table#8
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.5
1 0.8
2 1.0
3 1.3
4 1.5
5 1.8
6 2.0
7 2.3
8 2.6
9 2.8
10 3.1
11 3.3
12 3.6
13 3.9
14 4.1
15 4.4
16 4.6
17 4.9
18 5.2
19 5.4
20 5.7
21 5.9
22 6.2
23 6.5
24 6.7
25 7.0
26 7.2
27 7.5
28 7.8
29 8.0
30 8.3
31 8.6
32 8.8
33 9.1
34 9.4
35 9.6
36 9.9
37 10.2
38 10.4
39 10.7
40 11.0
41 11.2
42 11.5
43 11.8
44 12.1
45 12.3
46 12.6
47 12.9
48 13.1
49 13.4
50 13.7
51 14.0
52 14.2
53 14.5
54 14.8
55 15.1
56 15.4
57 15.6
58 15.9
59 16.2
60 16.5
61 16.8
62 17.1
63 17.3
64 17.6
65 17.9
66 18.2
67 18.5
68 18.8
69 19.1
70 19.4
71 19.7
72 20.0
73 20.2
74 20.5
75 20.8
76 21.1
77 21.4
78 21.7
79 22.0
80 22.4
81 22.7
82 23.0
83 23.3
84 23.6
85 23.9
86 24.2
87 24.5
88 24.9
89 25.2
90 25.5
91 25.8
92 26.1
93 26.5
94 26.8
95 27.1
96 27.5
97 27.8
98 28.1
99 28.5
100 28.8
101 29.2
102 29.5
103 29.9
104 30.2
Data Value
Delay Time(400.0ms)
Table#7
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.1
1 3.2
2 6.4
3 9.5
4 12.7
5 15.8
6 19.0
7 22.1
8 25.3
9 28.4
10 31.6
11 34.7
12 37.9
13 41.0
14 44.2
15 47.3
16 50.5
17 53.6
18 56.8
19 59.9
20 63.1
21 66.2
22 69.4
23 72.5
24 75.7
25 78.8
26 82.0
27 85.1
28 88.3
29 91.4
30 94.6
31 97.7
32 100.9
33 104.0
34 107.2
35 110.3
36 113.5
37 116.6
38 119.8
39 122.9
40 126.1
41 129.2
42 132.4
43 135.5
44 138.6
45 141.8
46 144.9
47 148.1
48 151.2
49 154.4
50 157.5
51 160.7
52 163.8
53 167.0
54 170.1
55 173.3
56 176.4
57 179.6
58 182.7
59 185.9
60 189.0
61 192.2
62 195.3
63 198.5
64 201.6
65 204.8
66 207.9
67 211.1
68 214.2
69 217.4
70 220.5
71 223.7
72 226.8
73 230.0
74 233.1
75 236.3
76 239.4
77 242.6
78 245.7
79 248.9
80 252.0
81 255.2
82 258.3
83 261.5
84 264.6
85 267.7
86 270.9
87 274.0
88 277.2
89 280.3
90 283.5
91 286.6
92 289.8
93 292.9
94 296.1
95 299.2
96 302.4
97 305.5
98 308.7
99 311.8
100 315.0
101 318.1
102 321.3
103 324.4
104 327.6
105 330.7
106 333.9
107 337.0
108 340.2
109 343.3
110 346.5
111 349.6
112 352.8
113 355.9
114 359.1
115 362.2
116 365.4
117 368.5
118 371.7
119 374.8
120 378.0
121 381.1
122 384.3
123 387.4
124 390.6
125 393.7
126 396.9
127 400.0
Data Value
Room Size
Table#6
Data Value
0 0.1
1 0.3
2 0.4
3 0.6
4 0.7
5 0.9
6 1.0
7 1.2
8 1.4
9 1.5
10 1.7
11 1.8
12 2.0
13 2.1
14 2.3
15 2.5
16 2.6
17 2.8
18 2.9
19 3.1
20 3.2
21 3.4
22 3.5
23 3.7
24 3.9
25 4.0
26 4.2
27 4.3
28 4.5
29 4.6
30 4.8
31 5.0
32 5.1
33 5.3
34 5.4
35 5.6
36 5.7
37 5.9
38 6.1
39 6.2
40 6.4
41 6.5
42 6.7
43 6.8
44 7.0
Data Value
Delay Time(200.0ms)
Table#5
Data Value Data Value Data Value
0 0.1
1 1.7
2 3.2
3 4.8
4 6.4
5 8.0
6 9.5
7 11.1
8 12.7
9 14.3
10 15.8
11 17.4
12 19.0
13 20.6
14 22.1
15 23.7
16 25.3
17 26.9
18 28.4
19 30.0
20 31.6
21 33.2
22 34.7
23 36.3
24 37.9
25 39.5
26 41.0
27 42.6
28 44.2
29 45.7
30 47.3
31 48.9
32 50.5
33 52.0
34 53.6
35 55.2
36 56.8
37 58.3
38 59.9
39 61.5
40 63.1
41 64.6
42 66.2
43 67.8
44 69.4
45 70.9
46 72.5
47 74.1
48 75.7
49 77.2
50 78.8
51 80.4
52 81.9
53 83.5
54 85.1
55 86.7
56 88.2
57 89.8
58 91.4
59 93.0
60 94.5
61 96.1
62 97.7
63 99.3
64 100.8
65 102.4
66 104.0
67 105.6
68 107.1
69 108.7
70 110.3
71 111.9
72 113.4
73 115.0
74 116.6
75 118.2
76 119.7
77 121.3
78 122.9
79 124.4
80 126.0
81 127.6
82 129.2
83 130.7
84 132.3
85 133.9
86 135.5
87 137.0
88 138.6
89 140.2
90 141.8
91 143.3
92 144.9
93 146.5
94 148.1
95 149.6
96 151.2
97 152.8
98 154.4
99 155.9
100 157.5
101 159.1
102 160.6
103 162.2
104 163.8
105 165.4
106 166.9
107 168.5
108 170.1
109 171.7
110 173.2
111 174.8
112 176.4
113 178.0
114 179.5
115 181.1
116 182.7
117 184.3
118 185.8
119 187.4
120 189.0
121 190.6
122 192.1
123 193.7
124 195.3
125 196.9
126 198.4
127 200.0
Data Value
Reverb time
Table#4
Data Value Data Value
0 0.3
1 0.4
2 0.5
3 0.6
4 0.7
5 0.8
6 0.9
7 1.0
8 1.1
9 1.2
10 1.3
11 1.4
12 1.5
13 1.6
14 1.7
15 1.8
16 1.9
17 2.0
18 2.1
19 2.2
20 2.3
21 2.4
22 2.5
23 2.6
24 2.7
25 2.8
26 2.9
27 3.0
28 3.1
29 3.2
30 3.3
31 3.4
32 3.5
33 3.6
34 3.7
35 3.8
36 3.9
37 4.0
38 4.1
39 4.2
40 4.3
41 4.4
42 4.5
43 4.6
44 4.7
45 4.8
46 4.9
47 5.0
48 5.5
49 6.0
50 6.5
51 7.0
52 7.5
53 8.0
54 8.5
55 9.0
56 9.5
57 10.0
58 11.0
59 12.0
60 13.0
61 14.0
62 15.0
63 16.0
64 17.0
65 18.0
66 19.0
67 20.0
68 25.0
69 30.0
MIDI Messages Transmitted/Received by the CS1x
MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and
System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI
messages which the CS1x can receive/transmit.
1. CHANNEL MESSAGES
Channel messages are the data related to the performance on the
keyboard for the specific channel.
1.1 Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off)
Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played.
Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60
Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is received)
Note On: Generated when a key is pressed.
Note Off: Generated when a key is released.
Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the
key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is
struck.
1.2 Control Change
Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control volume,
panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other
controller parameters, through specific Control Change numbers which
correspond to each of the various parameters.
1.2.1 Bank Select MSB (Control #000)
Bank Select LSB (Control #032)
Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by combining
and sending the MSB and LSB from an external device.
MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the tone generator
mode.
In XG mode, MSB numbers select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum
Voice), and LSB numbers select voice banks.
In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select voice banks.
(For more information about Banks and Programs, see Voice List in
the "Data List" book.)
A new bank selection will not become effective until the next
Program Change message is received.
1.2.2 Modulation (Control #001)
Messages which control vibrato depth using the Modulation Wheel.
Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0 results in
vibrato off.
1.2.3 Portamento Time (Control #005)
Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a continuous
pitch glide between successively played notes.
When the parameter 1.2.10 Portamento Switch is set to on, the value
set here can adjust the speed of pitch change.
Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento time and 0
results in minimum portamento time.
1.2.4 Data Entry MSB (Control #006)
Data Entry LSB (Control #038)
Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by
1.2.23RPN MSB/LSB and 1.2.22 NRPN MSB/LSB.
Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB.
1.2.5 Main Volume (Control #007)
Messages which control the volume of each Part.
Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in
volume off.
The messages 007 (Main Volume) or 011 (Expression) will be
transmitted using an optional controller connected to the FOOT
VOLUME jack on the rear panel if an appropriate setting is selected in
the Assign Control Number section in Utility mode.
1.2.6 Pan (Control #010)
Messages which control the stereo panning position of each Part (for
stereo output).
Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far right and 0
positions the sound to the far left.
1.2.7 Expression (Control #011)
Messages which control intonation expression of each Part during
performance.
Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in
volume off.
The messeges 007 (Main Volume) or 011 (Expression) will be
transmitted using an optional controller connected to the FOOT
VOLUME jack on the rear panel if an appropriate setting is selected in
the Assign Control Number section in Utility mode.
MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to
communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and
various other types of MIDI data, or messages.
The CS1x can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The CS1x can
be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI
channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices specified for the various Parts.
53
54
1.2.8 General Purpose 1, 2, 3, 4
(Control #016, 017, 018, 019)
Control #016 are messages which are transmitted by operating the
connected Foot Controller, used to control specific parameter such as
voice parameters and Variation effect parameters. Control #017 and
Control #018 are messages which are transmitted by operating the
ASSIGN1 and ASSIGN2 knobs, respectively. Control #019 is undefined.
1.2.9 Hold1 (Control #064)
Messages which control sustain on/off.
Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on, between 0 -
63 turns the sustain off.
1.2.10 Portamento Switch (Control #065)
Messages which control portamento on/off.
Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento on, between
0 - 63 turns the portamento off.
1.2.11 Sostenuto (Control #066)
Messages which control sostenuto on/off.
Holding specific notes and then pressing and holding the sostenuto
pedal will sustain those notes as you play subsequent notes, until
the pedal is released.
Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on, between 0
- 63 turns the sostenuto off.
1.2.12 Soft Pedal (Control #067)
Messages which control soft pedal on/off.
Notes played while holding the soft pedal will be dampened.
Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the soft pedal on, between 0
- 63 turns the soft pedal off.
1.2.13 Harmonic Content (Control #071)
Messages which adjust the filter resonance set for each voice.
The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or
subtracted from the voice data.
Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound.
Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than
the range available for adjustment.
1.2.14 Release Time (Control #072)
Messages which adjust the EG release time set for each voice.
The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or
subtracted from the voice data.
1.2.15 Attack Time (Control #073)
Messages which adjust the EG attack time set for each voice.
The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or
subtracted from the voice data.
1.2.16 Brightness (Control #074)
Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each voice.
The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or
subtracted from the voice data.
Lower values will result in a softer sound.
Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than
the range available for adjustment.
1.2.17 Portamento Control (Control #084)
Messages which apply a portamento between the currently-
sounding note and the subsequent note.
Portamento Control is transmitted specifying the note-on key of the
currently-sounding note.
Specify a Portamento Source Key number between 0 - 127.
When a Portamento Control message is received, the currently
sounding pitch will change with a Portamento Time of 0 to the next
note-on key on the same channel.
For example, the following settings would apply a portamento from
note C3 to C4.
90H 3CH 7FH C3 Note on
B0H 54H 3CH Source key number set to C3
90H 48H 7FH C4 Note on (When C4 is on, C3 is raised by a
portamento to C4.)
1.2.18 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (Control #091)
Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb effect.
1.2.19 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) (Control #093)
Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus effect.
1.2.20 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level)
(Control #094)
Messages which adjust the send level for the Variation effect.
If Variation effect uses System effect, this message sets the send
level for the Variation effect. If it uses Insertion effect, this setting is
invalid.
1.2.21 Data Increment (Control #096)
Decrement (Control #097) for RPN
Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of pitch bend
sensitivity, fine tune, or coarse tune in steps of 1. You are required to
assign one of those parameters using the RPN in the external device
in advance.
The data byte is ignored.
When the maximum value or minimum value is reached, the value
will not be incremented or decremented further.
(Incrementing the fine tune will not cause the coarse tune to be
incremented.)
1.2.22 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)LSB
(Control #098)
NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)MSB
(Control #099)
Messages which adjust a voice's vibrato, filter, EG, drum setup or
other parameter settings.
First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the parameter
which is to be controlled. Then use 1.2.4 Data Entry to set the value of
the specified parameter.
Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel, subsequent
data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN's value change.
Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH)
value to avoid an unexpected result.
The following NRPN numbers can be received.
55
1.2.23 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)LSB
(Control #100)
RPN (Registered Parameter Number)MSB
(Control #101)
Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a Part's pitch
bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter settings.
First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the parameter which
is to be controlled. Then use 1.2.21 Data Increment/Decrement to set
the value of the specified parameter.
Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data
entry will be recognized as the same RPN's value change. Therefore
after you use the RPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid
an unexpected result.
The following RPN numbers can be received.
1.2.24 Channel Mode Messages
The following Channel Mode Messages can be received.
1.2.24.1 All Sounds Off (Control #120)
Clears all sounds currently sounding on the specified channel.
However, the status of channel messages such as Note On and Hold
On is maintained.
2nd BYTE 3rd BYTE MESSAGE
120 0 All Sounds Off
121 0 Reset All Controllers
123 0 All Notes Off
12 6 0 ~ 16 Mono
127 0 Poly
RPN MSB RPN LSB PARAMETER
00 00 Pitch Bend Sensitivity
00 01 Fine Tune
00 02 Coarse Tune
7F 7F Null
NRPN MSB NRPN LSB PARAMETER
01 08 Vibrato Rate
01 09 Vibrato Depth
01 0A Vibrato Delay
01 20 Filter Cutoff Frequency
01 21 Filter Resonance
01 63 EG Attack Time
01 64 EG Decay Time
01 66 EG Release Time
14 rr Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency
15 rr Drum Filter Resonance
16 rr Drum EG Attack Rate
17 rr Drum EG Decay Rate
18 rr Drum Pitch Coarse
19 rr Drum Pitch Fine
1A rr Drum Level
1C rr Drum Pan
1D rr Drum Reverb Send Level
1E rr Drum Chorus Send Level
1F rr Drum Variation Send Level
*rr = Note number for each drum voice instrument.
1.2.24.2 Reset All Controllers (Control #121)
The values of the following controllers will be reset to the defaults.
1.2.24.3 All Notes Off (Control #123)
Clears all notes currently on for the specified channel.
However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue sounding
until these are turned off.
1.2.24.4 Mono (Control #126)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is
received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 - 16,
sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m = 1).
1.2.24.5 Poly (Control #127)
Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is
received, and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode (Mode 3).
1.3 Program Change
Messages which determine which voice to select for each Part.
With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic
voice numbers, but also variation voice bank numbers.
1.4 Channel Aftertouch
Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you
apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, over the entire
channel.
1.5 Polyphonic Key Pressure
Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you
apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, for each
individual key.
1.6 Pitch Bend
Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages that allow
the pitch of designated notes to be raised or lowered by a specified
amount over a specified duration.
CONTROLLER VALUE
Pitch Bend Change 0 (center)
Aftertouch 0 (off)
Modulation 0 (off)
Foot Controller 0 (min)
Expression 127 (max)
Hold1 0 (off)
Portamento 0 (off)*
Sostenuto 0 (off)
Soft Pedal 0 (off)
Portamento Control Cancels the Portamento source key number
RPN Number not specified; internal data will not change
NRPN
* In Performance mode, 1 (on).
Number not specified; internal data will not change
56
2. SYSTEM MESSAGES
System messages are the data related to the overall system of the device.
2.1 System Exclusive Messages
System Exclusive messages control various functions of the CS1x,
including master volume and master tuning, tone generator mode, effect
type and various other parameters.
2.1.1 General MIDI Mode On
When General MIDI mode on is received, the tone generator mode
will be changed to XG mode.
When this happens, the CS1x will receive the MIDI messages which
are compatible with GM System Level 1, and consequently will not
receive NRPN and Bank Select messages.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message.
F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal)
2.1.2 Master Volume
When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the System
Parameter.
F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal)
* mm(MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll(LSB) = ignored
2.1.3 XG System On
When this data is received, the CS1x will switch to XG mode and all
the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and XG-compatible
messages such as NRPN and Bank Select messages can be
received.
Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be
sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent
message.
F0 43 1n 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 (Hexadecimal)
*n = device number
TG300B Reset
F0 41 1n 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 (Hexadecimal)
*n = device number
2.2 Active Sensing (Receive only)
Once FE (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI data is
subsequently received for longer than an interval of approximately
300msec, the CS1x will perform the same function as when All Sounds
Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers messages are received, and
will then return to a status in which FE is not monitored.
Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the "Data List" book for more information
on the various messages.
57
KEYBOARD 61 keys with Initial Touch
TONE GENERATOR AWM2 (Wave ROM 4.5MB)
POLYPHONY 32 notes
MULTI TIMBRE 16 (DVA)
PERFORMANCE 128 Presets, 128 Users
VOICE Normal Voice XG 480
TG300B 579
Voices For Performances
Drum Voice XG 11
TG300B 10
ARPEGGIATOR 30
EFFECT Reverb 11
Chorus 11
Variation 43
CONTROLS POWER, VOLUME, PITCH, MODULATION, Sound Control Knobs 6, SCENE 1/2, Numeric
Keypad, ENTER, Mode Select (PERFORMANCE, MULTI, STORE, UTILITY), ARPEGGIATOR,
SHIFT/OCTAVE, PART/LAYER +/-, PRESET, USER, PROGRAM +/-, Edit Parameter Rotary Switch,
Parameter Value Up/Down buttons 10
DISPLAY LCD (Back Lit)
TERMINALS PHONES(Stereo Phone), OUTPUT(Phone): L[MONO]/R, DC IN, FOOT VOLUME, FOOT
CONTROLLER, FOOTSWITCH, INPUT, TO HOST, HOST SELECT, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU
POWER SUPPLY AC adaptor PA-3B
OUTPUT IMPEDANCE Line: 10k
, Phones: 33
DIMENSIONS 976(W)
˛ 285(D) ˛ 103(H)mm (38 3/8" ˛ 11 1/4" ˛ 4 1/16")
WEIGHT 5.7kg (12 lbs., 9 oz.)
ACCESSORIES Yamaha AC Adaptor PA-3B
Owner's Manual, Data List
Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the
right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment
or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer.
58
The following table provides troubleshooting hints and page references for some common problems. Most problems may be
simply the result of incorrect settings. Before calling for professional service, refer to the troubleshooting advice below to see
if you can find and correct the cause of the problem.
No sound.
Is the volume set appropriately? (Page 6)
When the Foot Controller is connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack, is the Foot Volume pressed down? (Page 8)
Are the volume settings for each Layer/Part appropriate? (Page 33, 37)
Are the effect settings appropriate? (Page 24, 49)
Is the Bank set to off? (Page 33, 37)
Is the receive channel set to off? (Page 42)
Is the audio equipment connected appropriately? (Page 9)
Is Local set to off? (Page 42)
If you are playing back song data using an external device, are the volume related settings for the song appropriate?
Are the Note Limit settings and/or Velocity Limit settings appropriate? (Page 27, 28)
No Arpeggiator sound.
Are the settings for the Velocity Limit appropriate? Set Velocity Limit Low to "0" and Velocity Limit Hi to "127". (Page 28)
Distorted sounds.
Are the effect settings appropriate? (Page 23, 34, 38)
Is the volume level set too loud?
Small sounds.
Is the MIDI volume or MIDI expression set too low?
Wrong pitch.
Are the tuning-related parameters set to "0"? Check the Note Shift setting (page 27), Detune setting (page 27),
Master Tuning (page 40) and Keyboard Transpose setting (page 40).
Sound is choppy and interrupted.
The maximum polyphony of 32 notes (the number of notes that can be played simultaneously) has been exceeded. (Page 35, 39)
Sound Control Knobs do not work.
Is a Scene key turned on? (Page 16)
Only one note sounds at a time.
Is the play mode set to MONO? (Page 35, 39)
Cannot enter Store mode.
Is Performance mode selected? (Page 44)
59
The following messages may appear during operation, indicating problems or incorrect operation. Follow the instructions in
the explanations below to remedy the problem.
Battery Low
The memory-backup battery is low; memory cannot be backed up. Store the necessary data to a MIDI data storage
device such as Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2, and have the battery changed by your local Yamaha dealer or any other
authorized Yamaha service personnel.
Device No.=off Error
Cannot send MIDI bulk data since the Device Number is set to off.
Device Number Error
Cannot receive MIDI bulk data, due to improper Device Number setting. Match the device numbers for both the CS1x and
the external device.
TG-B Mode Error
When TG300B mode is accidentally selected by receiving a TG300B reset message from an external device, you cannot
perform edit operations. Press PERFORMANCE or MULTI button to exit the TG300B mode.
Receiving
Displays when the CS1x receives the bulk data with the compatible format. Continue normal operation.
Rx Mode Error
Displays when receiving Performance bulk data in Multi Play mode or XG effect bulk in Performance mode.
60
[–]/NO/QUICK PC button ......................................................................................... 7
A
About MIDI ............................................................................................................. 53
AEG (Ampitude Envelope Generator) .................................................................. 30
ARPEGGIATOR ................................................................................................... 11, 22
ARPEGGIATOR button ............................................................................................... 6
ASSIGN 1 PARAM (Parameter) .............................................................................. 26
ASSIGN 2 ................................................................................................................ 29
ASSIGN CTRL NO (Assign Control Change Number) .......................................... 43
B
BANK ................................................................................................................ 33, 37
BULK DUMP (Performance Bulk Dump) .............................................................. 42
C
Common Edit 1 ...................................................................................................... 22
Common Edit 2 ...................................................................................................... 25
D
DC IN jack ................................................................................................................. 8
Demo Song .............................................................................................................. 11
DEVICE NO (Device Number) ................................................................................ 42
Drum Voices ........................................................................................................... 37
E
Edit Parameter Rotary Switch .................................................................................. 7
EFFECT ........................................................................................................ 23, 34, 38
Effect Data Assign Table ........................................................................................ 51
Effect Parameter List ............................................................................................. 49
Effect Type List ........................................................................................................ 49
Effects (System and Insertion) ................................................................................ 47
ENTER/YES button ..................................................................................................... 7
Error Messages ..................................................................................................... 59
F
Factory Settings ..................................................................................................... 46
FC (Foot Control) ..................................................................................................... 26
FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) ............................................................................. 31
FILTER ................................................................................................................ 34, 38
FOOT CONTROLLER jack ........................................................................................... 8
FOOT VOLUME jack .................................................................................................. 8
FOOTSWITCH jack .....................................................................................................8
H
HOST SELECT switch ................................................................................................. 8
I
INPUT jack ................................................................................................................. 8
K
KBD TRANS (Keyboard Transpose) ...................................................................... 40
L
Layer Edit 1 .............................................................................................................. 27
Layer Edit 2 ............................................................................................................. 30
Layer Edit 3 .............................................................................................................. 31
Layer Edit 4 ............................................................................................................. 33
Layers ...................................................................................................................... 16
LCD ............................................................................................................................ 7
LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) ............................................................................. 30
LOCAL (Local On/Off) ............................................................................................. 42
M
MASTER TUNE ........................................................................................................ 40
MIDI ......................................................................................................................... 41
MIDI terminals .......................................................................................................... 8
Mode Select Switches .............................................................................................. 7
MODULATION wheel ................................................................................................ 7
Multi ......................................................................................................................... 17
Multi Part Edit ......................................................................................................... 36
Multi Play Mode ............................................................................................... 17, 36
Multi Structure ........................................................................................................ 17
MW (Modulation Wheel) ....................................................................................... 25
N
NOTE ........................................................................................................................27
Normal Voices ........................................................................................................37
Numeric Keypad ...................................................................................................... 7
O
OUTPUT jacks ........................................................................................................... 8
P
P BEND RANGE (Pitch Bend Range) ..................................................................... 25
PAN ................................................................................................................... 34, 38
Parameter Value UP/DOWN Buttons ..................................................................... 7
PART/LAYER button ................................................................................................... 7
PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) ........................................................................... 32
PERFORM LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 23
PERFORM NAME .................................................................................................... 24
Performance Edit mode ........................................................................................ 21
Performance Mode ......................................................................................... 14, 20
Performance Play mode ...................................................................................... 20
Performance Structure ........................................................................................... 16
PHONES jack ............................................................................................................. 8
PITCH wheel ............................................................................................................. 7
POLY/MONO .................................................................................................... 35, 39
PORTA (Portamento) .............................................................................................. 26
POWER switch ........................................................................................................... 8
PRESET button ........................................................................................................... 7
PROGRAM ........................................................................................................ 33, 37
PROGRAM [–]/[+] button .......................................................................................... 7
Q
Quick Program Change ........................................................................................ 21
R
RCV CH (Receive Channel) ................................................................................... 42
S
SCENE 1 & 2 buttons ................................................................................................. 6
Scenes .............................................................................................................. 16, 45
SHIFT button .............................................................................................................. 7
SOUND CONTROL KNOBS ....................................................................................... 6
Store Mode ............................................................................................................ 44
SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 40
T
TG300B Mode ........................................................................................................37
TO HOST terminal ..................................................................................................... 8
TRANS CH (Transmit Channel) ............................................................................... 41
TUNE ........................................................................................................................27
U
USER button .............................................................................................................. 7
Utility Mode ............................................................................................................ 40
V
VEL (Velocity) ........................................................................................................... 28
VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) .................................................................................... 41
VEL FIX (Velocity Fix) ................................................................................................ 41
VOLUME ........................................................................................................... 33, 37
VOLUME knob .......................................................................................................... 6
X
XG Operation ......................................................................................................... 17
Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Nie-
derlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen
Bestimmungsländern erhältlich.
Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana
o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo.
For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the
authorized distributor listed below.
Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha
ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante.
ITALY
Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A.,
Combo Division
Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy
Tel: 02-935-771
SPAIN
Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A.
Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain
Tel: 91-577-7270
PORTUGAL
Valentim de Carvalho CI SA
Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras,
Portugal
Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823
GREECE
Philippe Nakas S.A.
Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece
Tel: 01-364-7111
SWEDEN
Yamaha Scandinavia AB
J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1
Box 30053
S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden
Tel: 031 89 34 00
DENMARK
YS Copenhagen Liaison Office
Generatorvej 8B
DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark
Tel: 44 92 49 00
FINLAND
Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music
Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260
SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland
Tel: 0435 011
NORWAY
Narud Yamaha AS
Grini Næringspark 17
N-1345 Østerås, Norway
Tel: 67 14 47 90
ICELAND
Skifan HF
Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120
IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland
Tel: 525 5000
OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of
Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
ASIA
HONG KONG
Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd.
11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road,
Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong
Tel: 730-1098
INDONESIA
PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor)
PT. Nusantik
Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot
Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia
Tel: 21-520-2577
KOREA
Cosmos Corporation
#131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul
Korea
Tel: 02-466-0021~5
MALAYSIA
Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd.
16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor,
Malaysia
Tel: 3-717-8977
PHILIPPINES
Yupangco Music Corporation
339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO,
Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines
Tel: 819-7551
SINGAPORE
Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd.
Blk 17A Toa Payoh #01-190 Lorong 7
Singapore 1231
Tel: 354-0133
TAIWAN
Kung Hsue She Trading Co., Ltd.
No. 322, Section 1, Fu Hsing S. Road,
Taipei 106, Taiwan. R.O.C.
Tel: 02-709-1266
THAILAND
Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd.
865 Phornprapha Building, Rama I Road,
Patumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand
Tel: 2-215-3443
THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA
AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2317
AFRICA
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2312
NORTH AMERICA
CANADA
Yamaha Canada Music Ltd.
135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario,
M1S 3R1, Canada
Tel: 416-298-1311
U.S.A.
Yamaha Corporation of America
6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620,
U.S.A.
Tel: 714-522-9011
OCEANIA
AUSTRALIA
Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd.
17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205,
Australia
Tel: 3-699-2388
NEW ZEALAND
Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd.
146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa,
Auckland, New Zealand
Tel: 9-634-0099
COUNTRIES AND TRUST
TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2317
MIDDLE & SOUTH AMERICA
MEXICO
Yamaha De Mexico S.A. De C.V.,
Departamento de ventas
Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del
Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F.
Tel: 686-00-33
BRASIL
Yamaha Musical Do Brasil LTDA.
Ave. Reboucas 2636, São Paulo, Brasil
Tel: 011-853-1377
PANAMA
Yamaha De Panama S.A.
Edificio Interseco, Calle Elvira Mendez no.10,
Piso 3, Oficina #105, Ciudad de Panama, Panama
Tel: 507-69-5311
OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES
AND CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES
Yamaha Music Latin America Corp.
6101 Blue Lagoon Drive, Miami, Florida 33126,
U.S.A.
Tel: 305-261-4111
MIDDLE EAST
TURKEY/CYPRUS
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
OTHER COUNTRIES
Yamaha Corporation,
International Marketing Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2312
EUROPE
THE UNITED KINGDOM
Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd.
Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes,
MK7 8BL, England
Tel: 01908-366700
IRELAND
Danfay Ltd.
61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin
Tel: 01-2859177
GERMANY/SWITZERLAND
Yamaha Europa GmbH.
Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen,
F.R. of Germany
Tel: 04101-3030
AUSTRIA
Yamaha Music Austria
Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria
Tel: 0222-60203900
THE NETHERLANDS
Yamaha Music Nederland
Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands
Tel: 030-2828411
BELGIUM
Yamaha Music Belgium
Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium
Tel: 02-7258220
FRANCE
Yamaha Musique France,
Division Professionnelle
BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valée Cedex 2, France
Tel: 01-64-61-4000
HEAD OFFICE Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division
Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430
Tel: 053-460-2445
SY11
120.q 97.6.3 2:52 PM y[W 1
ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES:
Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and envi-
ronmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the
production methods used to produce them, meet these goals.
In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to
be aware of the following:
Battery Notice:
This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if
applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of
battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes nec-
essary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the re-
placement.
This Product may also use "household" type batteries. Some of these
may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a
rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery
being charged.
When installing batteries, do not mix old batteries with new, or with
batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly.
Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and
battery case rupture.
Warning:
Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all
batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and
as regulated by the laws in your area.
Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area
for battery disposal information.
Disposal Notice:
Should this Product become damaged beyond repair, or for some
reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all
local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of prod-
ucts that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable
to assist you, Please contact Yamaha directly.
NAME PLATE LOCATION:
The name Plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model
number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this
plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the
date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual
as a permanent record of your purchase.
Model
Serial No.
Purchase Date
SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION (USA)
This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter).
DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other
than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically
recommended by Yamaha.
WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone
could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting
cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended!
IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25'
cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the
larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, con-
sult a local electrician.
This Product should be used only with the components supplied or; a
cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is
used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that ac-
company the accessory product.
SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE:
The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at
the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or
modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update
existing units.
This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and
headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels
that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long
periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfort-
able. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you
should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound,
the shorter the time period before damage occurs.
Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mount-
ing fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional
accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer as-
sembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and
any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE
using.
Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other
uses are recommended.
NOTICE:
Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a
function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are
not covered by the manufacturer's warranty, and are therefore the
owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult
your dealer before requesting service.
PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL
92-BP
FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A)
1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!
This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly
approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.
2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables.
Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC
authorization to use this product in the USA.
3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices.
Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not
result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used
according to the instructions found in the user's manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance
with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference,
which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures :
Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.
Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.
In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna.
If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.
If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the your local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product.
If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe
Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620
The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.
ADVARSEL!
Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejiatig håndtering.
Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type.
Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp
eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av
apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
VAROITUS
Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennttu. Vaihda
paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin.
Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti.
NEDERLAND
NETHERLAND
Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up.
This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up.
Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij
op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de
levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing
Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel. 030-2828425
For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at
the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha
Service Center as follows:
Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center
Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT
Tel : 030-2828425
Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.
Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small
chemical waste.

Transcripción de documentos

PRECAUTIONS IMPORTANT! PLEASE READ BEFORE PROCEEDING. Following the important precautions below will help ensure you many years of trouble free use from your CS1x. LOCATION • In order to avoid causing serious damage to the CS1x, do not expose it to direct sunlight, high temperatures, excessive humidity, excessive dust or strong vibration. • Always place the CS1x on a solid surface such as a keyboard stand or a sturdy table or desk. POWER SUPPLY • Turn the power switch off when the CS1x is not in use. • Use only the supplied PA-3B or an equivalent AC power adaptor. Use of an incompatible adaptor may result in irreparable damage to the CS1x, and could even pose a serious shock hazard. • The power adaptor should be unplugged from the AC outlet if the CS1x is not to be used for an extended period of time. • Unplug the CS1x during electrical storms. • Avoid plugging the CS1x into the same AC outlet as appliances with high power consumption such as electric heaters or ovens. Also avoid using multiple-plug adapters since these can result in reduced sound quality and possibly even damage to the instrument. UNPLUG ALL INSTRUMENTS WHEN MAKING CONNECTIONS • To avoid causing damage to the CS1x and other devices to which it is connected, such as a sound system or MIDI instruments, turn off the power and unplug all related devices prior to connecting or disconnecting audio and MIDI cables. ELECTRICAL INTERFERENCE • Avoid using the CS1x near televisions, radios or other devices which generate electromagnetic fields, since this may cause the CS1x to malfunction, and possibly generate interference noise in the other devices. diluted, mild detergent. Then wipe the instrument thoroughly with a dry cloth. • Avoid placing vinyl objects on top of the instrument, since vinyl can stick to and discolor the surface. DATA BACKUP BACK-UP BATTERY • The CS1x contains a special long-life battery that retains the contents of its User memory when the power is turned off. The back-up battery should last for several years. When it needs to be replaced, the message "Battery Low" will appear in the display when the power is turned on. When this happens, have the backup battery replaced by qualified Yamaha service personnel. Do not attempt to replace the backup battery yourself. HANDLING AND TRANSPORT • Always handle the CS1x with care. Physical shocks caused by dropping, bumping, or placing heavy objects on it can result in serious damage to the CS1x. • Yamaha recommends that you regularly save your music data using an external MIDI data storage device such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for the accidental loss of CS1x data. SERVICE AND MODIFICATION • The CS1x contains no user serviceable parts, so never open the case or tamper with the internal circuitry in any way. Doing so may result in electrical shock or damage to the instrument. Refer all servicing to qualified Yamaha service personnel. IMPORTANT NOTE • Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts. Yamaha cannot be held responsible for damage to the CS1x resulting from improper handling or operation, or for the accidental loss of CS1x data. • Disconnect all cables before moving the CS1x. Always unplug cables by gripping the plug firmly, and not by pulling on the cable. NOTICES CLEANING • Never use chemical solvents or thinners to clean the CS1x, since these will damage the finish or dull the keys. Wipe the instrument clean with a soft, dry cloth. If necessary, use a soft, clean cloth slightly moistened with a 1 • The company names and product names in this owner's manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective companies. • The LCD screens as illustrated in this owner's manual are for instructional purposes, and may appear somewhat different from the screens which appear on your instrument. Introduction In the beginning, there was the knob… And the knob was good. Great, in fact. You could just reach out and grab it. Turn it left. And turn it right. Interact with it in realtime. And there were knobs of all kinds. Knobs for changing the attack and release times of a sound. Knobs for setting the cutoff filter and resonance. And knobs for controlling many other aspects of analog synthesizer sounds. By twisting a knob one way and another, a vast, practically endless variety of electronic sounds could be called forth. Fat sounds. Strange sounds. Beautiful sounds. Magical sounds. It was the 1960s, and such was the power of the knob that music was changed forever. And the term synthesizer became a household word. But the knob was not perfect… From the start the knob was brilliant and easy to grasp. It put the musician in complete control of the sound. And opened up a whole new world of sonic exploration. It was the 1970s, and some of the greatest recordings in music history were being made. Analog "synths" were finding their way into the stages, studios and professional composing suites of the world. But as simple, straightforward and powerful as analog synths were, they were also for the most part priced out of reach of the struggling musician. Plus they tended to be sensitive to slight fluctuations in electric current which frequently wreaked havoc with pitch, thus making tuning inherently unstable. And there was no reliable way to save panel settings and original sounds except for tediously scrawling lists and notes with pencil and paper. Surely there must be a better way. Engineers the world over went to work searching for a better way, and great strides were made in the development of more stable, lower cost, and more convenient technologies. A breakthrough in electronic sound synthesis was imminent. Then came the miracle of digital… The beginning of the 1980s saw breakthroughs in digital synthesizer technology which was to once again revolutionize modern music. Musicians everywhere embraced affordable new technologies like FM, which could accurately reproduce the sound characteristics of acoustic and other instruments, and AWM (PCM), which relied on "samples" of actual instrument sounds to produce an amazing wealth of musical textures and sonic options. The new spate of digital synthesizers were—on the outside—much more streamlined than analog synths, sporting a minimal array of buttons and a display screen which provided information about each feature. Overnight the knob was rendered virtually obsolete. Unstable tunings were a thing of the past. Memory was the future. Digital synths were—on the inside—more loaded than ever, as hundreds of amazing acoustic and electronic sounds, or voices, could be stored and recalled at the touch of a button. Scores of new and exciting features were available. Entire panel settings and configurations could also be stored for instant recall. It was the digital revolution that made MIDI, GM, XG, sequencing, sampling, looping, multitimbral play, DSP effects and many other breakthroughs in electronic music technology possible. Developments that have changed forever the way we teach, compose, 2 perform and listen to music. Global design standards ensured that music hardware and software products made by different manufacturers could work together seamlessly. But alas, digital did not create a perfect world. on the panel. A collection of six rotary Sound Control Knobs are irresistible to the touch—and provide instant sonic results when turned. Between the Sound Control Knobs, the clearly labeled panel switches, and the back lit LCD, the current status of the CS1x is always crystal clear. The numeric keypad and other buttons—including Scenes, or "snapshots" of knob positions—give you quick and easy access to any parameter or setup you need, the moment you need it. As such, the CS1x is an unprecedented realtime performance instrument. The hundreds of great sounding AWM2 (Advanced Wave Memory 2) instrument voices (created from high quality recordings of actual instrument and other sounds), three digital effects units (with 11 Reverb, 11 Chorus and 43 Variation type effects) and scores of other parameters can be configured in an almost unlimited variety of ways and stored in memory for instant recall. Performances, or complete configurations of up to four Layers (voices) playing simultaneously, plus effect and other parameters, and Multis, or a configuration of up to 16 Parts and other parameters for multitimbral play (using an external sequencer or computer), provide a unique array of options which make the CS1x a handy synth for literally any type of music situation. Thirty-two notes of polyphony ensure that you always have enough available notes to play even the most demanding arrangement. The on-board arpeggiator which can generate various types of automatic arpeggios or be controlled by an external MIDI clock provides an extremely useful tool for spicing up your masterpieces—or setting the dance floor on fire. Chaos reigned over the land… As convenient, dynamic and accessible as digital synthesis was, still it was not perfect. It had certain limitations, though different ones than analog synthesis. Streamlined panel layouts and the demise of the knob meant that all those hundreds of great new features had to be organized and stacked in pages and subpages of hidden menus—which might mean several presses of one or more buttons just to find a feature, and several more to actually manipulate it. And the steep learning curve of many digital synthesizers became a legend unto itself. Alarmingly, the synth was on its way to becoming a thing of science, rather than an intuitive musical instrument. It was, therefore, inevitable that many would come to mourn nostalgically for the days of simplicity—for the knob. For those warm, fat, wonderful analog sounds. For fewer hidden features. And for a simpler, easier to use electronic instrument. There was a definite need for an analog-style digital synthesizer that would have intuitive knobs plus all the benefits of digital memories and other convenient—especially interactive—features. One that could satisfy even the most die-hard advocate of analog or digital synthesis. A perfectly versatile synthesizer as attractive to first-time synth owners as to desktop music hobbyists, serious amateurs, and even seasoned professionals. A powerful stand-alone performance instrument with hot dance music and other versatile voices, as suited for the cutting edge as for the classics. An ideal multitimbral MIDI component which could fit right into even the most sophisticated expanded system. One with extremely modest pricing for such powerful utility. It was only a matter of time before the thunder of analog would unite with the lightning of digital to once again challenge convention and ultimately change the landscape of music possibilities yet once more. Go forth and multiply… As simple—yet powerful—as the CS1x is on its own, it has also been specially engineered to easily fit right into any type of expanded music system you wish to create. General MIDI (GM) compatibility makes the CS1x an ideal multitimbral tone generator for accurately playing any of the many Standard MIDI File or other commercially available GM music data using an external sequencer. XG compatibility makes the CS1x completely state of the art— conveniently able to take advantage of the expanded sound and expressive capabilities that this exciting new format will offer in the coming months and years. A TO HOST terminal and HOST SELECT switch provides for direct interface with either PC and Macintosh computers, thus enabling you to easily jump right into the "desktop music" revolution without the need for any additional peripheral interfacing equipment. If you're a first-time synthesizer owner, the CS1x lets you expand your music system at your own pace. First you might want to add an affordable Yamaha QY series sequencer and take advantage of the CS1x's powerful multitimbral capabilities. With a QY sequencer you can record and play back up to 16 music "parts", each on an independent MIDI channel—just like a multitrack recorder, but with virtually unlimited editing capabilities. Next you might want to add the compact, low-cost Yamaha SU10 sampler which lets you capture music phrases and other sounds to add an entirely unique dimension to your music. Finally you might want to add a computer which will let you take advantage of the many different types of music software products now available plus those yet to come. With the CS1x at the heart of your system, you're ready to grow your own unique music system and take your musical capabilities as far as you want—naturally. And Yamaha heard their cries… Fortunately Yamaha recognized that something new and significant must be created to bring together the best of both analog and digital worlds. The result was the Yamaha Control Synthesizer CS1x. The CS1x takes the best of analog—simplicity of use, natural interactivity, thick sound, and, of course, the knob—and unites it with the best of digital—reliable pitch, plenty of memory, one-touch setting reconfigurations, hundreds of voices, MIDI, and much, much more— to begat a truly unique "control" synthesizer. One with all the familiar concepts loved by both analog and digital afficianados. One destined to satisfy even the most meticulous purist in each camp. Nothing to hide… Perhaps the most striking—certainly refreshing—aspect of the CS1x Control Synthesizer is the way it wears its heart on its sleeve. What you see is what you get: all features are self-evidently displayed 3 CS1x MAIN FEATURES The CS1x is specially designed with an intuitive, interactive user interface through lots of dedicated panel controls and sound editing features which can easily be manipulated in realtime during performance. Main features include: • 6 Sound Control Knobs for direct access to key parameters of the currently selected voice as you play, and 2 Scene memories for instant recall of specified Sound Control Knob positions. You can use the Modulation Wheel or a connected Foot Controller for continuous changes between Scene 1 and Scene 2 parameter values. • 480 GM- and XG-compatible AWM2 instrument voices and 11 drum voices, or kits, in Multi Play mode. Additional voices are available in Performance mode which can be assigned to the Performances. • Performance mode with complete configurations of Layers (4 voices either stacked or in sophisticated keyboard and velocity splits), digital effects and other parameters. There are a total of 128 Preset Performances and 128 User Performances. • Multi Play mode for multitimbral play of up to 16 different Parts (across 16 MIDI channels; when using an external sequencer), with 32-note polyphony. TO HOST terminal and HOST SELECT switch allow direct interface with IBM PC/AT or Apple Macintosh computers. • 3 independent DSP digital effect units which can be used simultaneously— Reverb (11 types), Chorus (11 types) and Variation (43 types). • Arpeggiator with 30 types of arpeggiated chords and 10 timing subdivisions. The Arpeggiator's tempo can also be controlled by an external MIDI clock. 4 CONTENTS The CS1x At A Glance .....................................6 Getting Started ............................................9 How The CS1x Generates Sound ................... 12 CS1x Main Operating Modes ........................ 14 Feature Reference ............ 20 Performance Mode .....................................20 Common Edit 1 ........................................ 22 Common Edit 2 ....................................... 25 Layer Edit 1 ............................................. 27 Layer Edit 2 .............................................30 Layer Edit 3 ............................................. 31 Layer Edit 4............................................. 33 Multi Play Mode.......................................... 36 Utility Mode ...............................................40 Store Mode .................................................44 Factory Settings .........................................46 Appendix ............................. 47 Digital Effects ............................................ 47 About MIDI ................................................. 53 Specifications ............................................. 57 Troubleshooting ......................................... 58 Error Messages ........................................... 59 Index..........................................................60 5 THE CS1x AT A GLANCE PHONES L/MONO R DC IN POWER OUTPUT FOOT FOOT FOOT VOLUME CONTROLLER SWITCH INPUT TO HOST HOST SELECT IN OUT THRU MIDI ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO TYPE P BEND RANGE NOTE SFT VWX PERFORMANCE AMP EG VOLUME MULTI ATTACK RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA ARPEGGIO HOLD STORE UTILITY SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE 2 MW/FC PRESET + 8 9 PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 3 PRESET USER ARPEGGIATOR CUTOFF RESONANCE SPACE 0 PROGRAM FILTER PITCH 7 MNO REV TYPE EFECT VARI TYPE FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK LEVEL CUTOFF NOTE VARI VARI PARAM DATA PORTA SWITCH TIME VARI EF VEL OFFSET DEPTH AEG *& ABC USER 1 SCENE YZ' PERFORM LEVEL LIMIT LOW SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD PMOD TUNE DETUNE ATK TIME DCY TIME PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON ASSIGN2 PARAM DATA LFO FEG WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY ENTER NO/ QUICK PC ASSIGN 2 YES MASTER TUNE SYSTEM KBD VEL CURVE TRANS MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL BULK DUMP ASSIGN CTRL NO UTILITY MODULATION Front Panel ! VOLUME Turn this knob to set the proper listening level whether using headphones or amplified speakers. " SOUND CONTROL KNOBS The six Sound Control Knobs give you direct access to key parameters of the currently selected Performance/voice. Turning any Sound Control Knob to the left or right will offset the parameter values accordingly (left for negative values, right for positive values) and produce an immediate result; a letter "E" will appear next to the Performance number in the LCD to indicate the original voice has been edited. Each knob has a center detent which represents the original value of the parameter. • ATTACK (Knob 1) - This knob controls the initial attack time of the voice. Turn it left for a faster attack time; turn it right for a slower attack time. (See page 30) • ASSIGN 2 (Knob 6) - This knob can be used to control any one of 28 parameters which you can assign to it—including Volume, Note Shift, Pan, Chorus Send, and others. (See page 29.) • RELEASE (Knob 2) - This knob controls the release time of the voice. Turn it left for a shorter release time; turn it right for a longer release time. (See page 32.) # SCENE 1 & 2 • ASSIGN 1/DATA (Knob 3) - This knob has two functions. As an ASSIGN 1 knob, you can assign one of 28 parameters—including Performance Volume, Arpeggiator Tempo or Type, Portamento Time, and others—to control by turning it (see page 26). As a DATA entry knob, you can use it to quickly change the edit value of the currently selected edit parameter. Each Performance has two Scene memories which remember specific positions of the six Sound Control Knobs. (See page 16.) • Simply press SCENE 1 or SCENE 2 to instantly recall the specified settings. An LED beside each SCENE button will light to indicate which Scene is currently active. You can store your own Scenes in advance using Store mode. (See page 44.) • CUTOFF (Knob 4) - This knob determines the cutoff frequency of the filter, or the frequency point above which other frequencies are filtered out. Turn it left for a deeper, more rounded tone; turn it right for a thinner, brighter tone. (See page 25.) • By holding one SCENE button and then pressing the other SCENE button, both LED's will light, indicating that you can use the Modulation Wheel or a connected Foot Controller for realtime continuous parameter changes between one Scene and the other. (See page 45.) • RESONANCE (Knob 5) - This knob determines the amount of filter resonance or emphasis of the cutoff frequency. Turn it left to produce a relatively flat response; turn it right to add overtones and make the sound more resonant. (See page 34.) 6 $ ARPEGGIATOR Press this button to activate the onboard Arpeggiator, which lets you create automatic arpeggios simply by playing a chord. An indicator will appear in the lower right area of the LCD when the Arpeggiator is on. (See page 22.) • There are various Arpeggiator Types and Arpeggiator Timing Subdivisions. These, plus the Arpeggiator Tempo, can be specified with the Common Edit 1 menu parameters. (See page 23.) • Pressing this button while holding SHIFT will "hold" the arpeggiated chord, or make it continue playing even when you release the keys. Pressing this button again stops the Arpeggiator. (See page 23.) • An Arpeggiator Split function lets you split the keyboard at C3; the chords you play to the left of the split point will create arpeggiated chords, and the notes and chords you play to the right of the split point will play as normal. (See page 23.) % SHIFT This button lets you transpose the octave up or down as well as activate the Arpeggiator Hold and Split functions. (See page 23.) • To transpose the octave, hold the SHIFT button and press [–] (octave down) or [+] (octave up)—located directly beneath the SHIFT button. (See page 15.) & PART/LAYER [–]/[+] These buttons let you select one of the four Layers in Performance mode (see page 14), or one of the 16 Parts in Multi Play mode (see page 17). Which Layer or Part is currently selected will be indicated in the lower right area of the LCD. ' PRESET In Performance mode, press this button to activate the bank of 128 Preset Performances. (See page 20.) ( USER In Performance mode, press this button to activate the bank of 128 User Performances. (See page 20.) ) PROGRAM [–]/[+] Press one of these to step up ([+]) or down ([–]) through each Performance (in Performance mode) or voice (in Multi Play mode), one at a time. (See page 20.) * BACK LIT LCD Performance (Performance mode) or voice (Multi Play mode) within the currently designated group of 10—by simply punching in the last digit (0~9) of the desired Performance or voice number. (See page 21.) • When naming a User Performance, you can use it to select the letters of the name, as indicated above each button. (See page 24.) , [–]/NO/QUICK PC • As a [–] button, you can use it to enter negative values when editing parameters using the numeric keypad. Press it before entering the number, followed by ENTER. • In Performance mode or Multi Play mode, press it once to engage the Quick Program Change function. The hundredth and tenth digits of the Performance or voice number will be shown as bold characters to indicate they are fixed when Quick Program Change is active. Press the button again to turn off Quick Program Change. (See page 21.) The numeric keypad has several functions, depending on the currently selected mode. • In Performance mode or Multi Play mode, you can use it to select a specific Performance number or voice number—by punching in the desired number (1~128), then pressing the ENTER button. (See page 20.) • UTILITY - Press this button to access those "system" parameters which affect the CS1x as a whole—such as Master Tune, MIDI Transmit and Receive Channel numbers, Local On/Off, etc.—as printed directly below each Parameter Value UP/ DOWN button. (See page 40.) / EDIT PARAMETER ROTARY SWITCH - ENTER/YES This button has three functions. + NUMERIC KEYPAD These ten buttons are used to access specific parameters in Performance, Multi and Utility modes, as well as change the values of the currently selected edit parameter. • STORE - This button lets you store User Performances. as well as Scenes. (See page 44.) • In Store mode, this button lets you decline (NO) the store operation if you change your mind. • When designating edit parameter values using the numeric keypad, you must press ENTER to activate the change. (See page 22.) Press one of these to select the current operating mode. • MULTI - Press this button to enter Multi Play mode, which lets you designate up to 16 Parts for multitimbral play when using an external sequencer. Parameters which can be edited in Multi Play mode are printed in a row directly above the Parameter Value UP/ DOWN buttons. (See page 36.) This button has three functions. • When selecting a Performance number (Performance mode) or voice number (Multi Play mode) using the numeric keypad, you must press ENTER to activate the change. (See page 20.) 0 PARAMETER VALUE UP/DOWN BUTTONS • PERFORMANCE - In Performance mode you can choose any of the Preset or User Performances, plus perform editing operations using the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Press PERFORMANCE to enter Performance mode from another mode, or to reselect the Performance select screen in the LCD after performing an edit operation in Performance mode. (See page 20.) • When editing parameters, you can use it to quickly select a specific value—by punching in the desired number, then pressing ENTER. (See page 20.) The LCD provides various types of information which clearly indicates the current operating status of the CS1x, depending on which mode or other button on the front panel that you press. . MODE SELECT SWITCHES Turn this knob to select one of the six menus of edit parameters in Performance mode. • COMMON - The Common parameters (Common Edit 1, 2 menus) are those parameters which apply to the entire currently selected Performance; i.e., it doesn't matter which Layer is currently selected, since common parameters (except for Portamento) apply to all layers equally. (See page 14.) • In Store mode, this button lets you confirm (YES) the store operation. (See page 44.) • LAYER - The Layer parameters (Layer Edit 1, 2, 3, 4 menus) are those parameters which affect only the currently selected Layer (1~4, as designated by the PART/LAYER buttons) in a Performance. (See page 14.) • In Quick Program Change mode, you can use it to select a specific 7 • PERFORMANCE MODE - After selecting an Edit menu row with the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch, press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button located beneath the desired parameter once to access the parameter. The parameter name and current value will appear in the LCD. Then press [UP] or [DOWN] to increase or decrease the current parameter value as desired. (See page 14.) • MULTI PLAY MODE - Simply press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button located beneath the desired parameter as printed on the panel, directly above each button. The parameter name and current value will appear in the LCD. Then press [UP] or [DOWN] to increase or decrease the current parameter value as desired. (See page 17.) • UTILITY MODE - Simply press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button located above the desired parameter as printed on the panel, directly below each button. The parameter name and current value will appear in the LCD. Then press [UP] or [DOWN] to increase or decrease the current parameter value as desired. (See page 40.) 1 PITCH The Pitch Wheel lets you bend the pitch up or down as you play. It is spring-loaded to automatically return to center position when you let go of it. In Performance mode you can designate the Pitch Bend Range in the Common Edit 2 menu. (See page 25.) 2 MODULATION The Modulation Wheel lets you apply or set a designated amount of vibrato or tremolo. You can set it to affect filter cutoff, filter modulation, pitch modulation (Common Edit 2 menu, see page 25), as well as other controllable parameters. (see page 43.) THE CS1x AT A GLANCE MIDI THRU OUT IN Rear Panel ! MIDI MIDI IN, OUT and THRU terminals let you connect other MIDI devices such as a MIDI keyboard, tone generator, sequencer, or computer with a MIDI cable. (Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI when using the MIDI terminals.) MIDI IN is for input of MIDI data. MIDI OUT is for output of MIDI data and for data dumps to another CS1x or MIDI data storage device. MIDI THRU is for "daisy-chain" connection of additional MIDI instruments, as the MIDI data received at the CS1x's MIDI IN terminal is passed along unchanged to the CS1x's MIDI THRU terminal. (See page 9.) " HOST SELECT The HOST SELECT switch lets you designate the type of host computer. (See page 10.) Set it to MIDI for normal MIDI transmission and reception when a host computer is not connected. HOST SELECT PC-2 PC-1 MIDI Mac ASSIGNABLE TO HOST INPUT FOOT FOOT FOOT SWITCH CONTROLLER VOLUME # TO HOST POWER ON OFF Variation effect (Common Edit 2 menu, see page 26), as well as the Control Change Number. (see page 43.) The TO HOST terminal lets you connect the CS1x directly to a host computer which does not have a MIDI interface. (See page 10.) ' FOOT VOLUME $ INPUT An optional Yamaha FC7 or FC9 foot controller connected to this jack can be used to regulate overall volume. Connect an external audio source (such as a keyboard, or CD player) here using either a stereo or mono mini plug, in order to mix its audio signals with the CS1x's voices, for output from the CS1x without the need for an external mixer. ( POWER Press this switch to turn the CS1x on and off. % FOOTSWITCH ) DC IN An optional Yamaha FC4 or FC5 footswitch connected to this jack can be used to control hold on/off, portamento on/off and others, determined by the Assign Control Change Number setting in Utility mode. (see page 43.) Connect the supplied Yamaha PA3B Power Adaptor here. (CAUTION: Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the Yamaha PA-3B or equivalent, since the use of an incompatible adaptor may cause irreparable damage to the CS1x, and may even pose a serious shock hazard.) & FOOT CONTROLLER An optional Yamaha FC7 or FC9 foot controller connected to this jack can be used for control of filter modulation, filter cutoff, and the 8 OUTPUT DC IN R PHONES L/MONO * OUTPUT The stereo OUTPUT jacks let you connect the CS1x to an external stereo amplifier/speaker system. When using a mono system, connect it to the L/MONO jack. + PHONES The PHONES jack lets you connect a set of stereo headphones for private listening. GETTING STARTED Setting Up Your CS1x The Control Synthesizer CS1x literally comes ready to play right out of the box. The CS1x With An External Sequencer Connect the supplied PA-3B DC power adaptor to the CS1x's DC IN connector on the rear panel. Then connect the adaptor to the nearest electrical outlet. The illustration below shows how to use the CS1x with a Yamaha QY series sequencer, which lets you take full advantage of the CS1x's multitimbral capability to play up to 16 different musical instrument Parts at once. Before switching on the power, connect any peripheral devices such as amplified speakers or MIDI instruments. You will need MIDI cables to make the proper connections. There are many ways to incorporate the CS1x into a simple or expanded music system. Below are a few examples to get you started. 1. Connect a MIDI cable from the CS1x's MIDI OUT terminal to the sequencer's MIDI In terminal, and connect another MIDI cable from the CS1x's MIDI IN terminal to the sequencer's MIDI Out terminal. CAUTION 2. Set the HOST SELECT switch to MIDI. • Do not attempt to use an AC adaptor other than the PA-3B. Use of an incompatible adaptor may result in irreparable damage to the CS1x, and could even pose a serious shock hazard. HOST SELECT PC-2 PC-1 MIDI Mac • Be sure to disconnect the power adaptor from the electrical outlet when the CS1x is not in use. MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI QY300 etc... OUT QY300 The CS1x By Itself MUSIC SEQUENCER MIDI IN CS1x At the simplest level, all you need to do is connect stereo headphones to the PHONES jack located on the rear panel. In this case, the notes you play on the keyboard will be sent as MIDI note event data to a specified MIDI channel of the sequencer. By selecting different channels, you can record each Part independently, while listening to those Parts you've already recorded. As a stand-alone performance instrument, simply connect the CS1x to amplified speakers, as follows: For stereo use, connect one end of a pair of audio cables to the CS1x's OUTPUT (L/MONO, R) jacks, and the other end to each amplified speaker's input, as shown in the illustration below. (For mono use, connect one end of a single audio cable to the CS1x's L/MONO jack, and the other end to the amplified speaker's input.) When recording Parts to an external sequencer, you need to turn the keyboard Local setting to OFF (see page 42). When keyboard Local is turned off, the notes you play on the keyboard will not sound the CS1x's internal tone generator, but note and other performance event data will still be sent from the MIDI OUT terminal. Since the CS1x's internal tone generator will respond to note and other data it receives at the MIDI IN terminal, the notes you play on the keyboard will be sent to the sequencer, then "echoed back" to the CS1x to play one of the 16 Parts (depending on the current MIDI channel assignment). AMPLIFIED SPEAKERS L PHONES L R INPUT For details about assigning CS1x MIDI channels, see page 41. For details about assigning MIDI channels and other settings for the external devices such as a sequencer, consult the owner's manual of each. R OUTPUT CS1x CAUTION In order to avoid possible damage to the speakers or other connected electronic equipment, before switching on the power of any component, make sure the CS1x's volume level and the volume levels of the connected equipment are set to minimum. 9 Connecting The CS1x To A MIDI Data Storage Device Macintosh If you have an Apple Macintosh not equipped with an external MIDI interface, perform the following operation: You can also connect the CS1x with a MIDI data storage device, such as the Yamaha MDF2 MIDI Data Filer in order to "bulk dump", or save a User Performance ("1 Perf" setting) or all the User Performances and Utility parameters ("All" setting) to floppy disks. 1. Set the HOST SELECT switch to Mac. 2. Connect the TO HOST terminal on the CS1x to the Modem or Printer port on the Macintosh. This lets you build up complete libraries of Performance and other data, which you can easily load back into the CS1x. (The MDF2 also lets you play compatible song data on the CS1x directly from the MDF2 itself, without the need for a sequencer.) 3. Turn on the host computer, then turn on the CS1x. 4. Start up your music software, and set up the appropriate options in the software for operation with the CS1x. For information about how to perform Bulk Dump operations with the CS1x, see page 42. Refer to the owner's manual of the MIDI data storage device for operating instructions about sending and receiving data. The options you may have to set for the Apple MIDI Driver settings: MIDI Interface Type (Clock) ➛ 1 MHz HOST SELECT PC-2 PC-1 MIDI Mac MIDI IN Other options and settings may have to be made as well. Refer to the owner's manual of your particular music software for more information. MDF2 etc... MIDI OUT MIDI OUT IBM PC and Clones MIDI MDF2 MDR SEO JOB UTIL If you have an IBM PC/AT or compatible computer not equipped with an external MIDI interface, perform the following operation: MIDI DATA FILTER CURSOR - FILE DATA + REC PAUSE START/STOP TEMPO MIDI IN CS1x 1. Set the HOST SELECT switch to PC-2. The CS1x In A Desktop Music System 2. Connect the TO HOST terminal on the CS1x to one of the computer's serial ports, COM 1 or COM 2. With its built-in host computer interface the CS1x is designed for direct connection to an Apple Macintosh, IBM PC/AT or NEC PC-9800 Series computer—without the need for a special MIDI interface between the computer and the CS1x. 3. Turn on the host computer, then turn on the CS1x. 4. Start up your music software, and set up the appropriate options in the software for operation with the CS1x. Using the CS1x in a computer music system lets you receive the full benefits of the instrument's true capabilities, as well as take advantage of the ever-expanding world of available music sequencer and other software products which provide you with unlimited potential to achieve your personal music goals. Refer to the owner's manual of your particular music software for more information. MIDI/Computer Connecting Cables If your computer already has a MIDI interface installed, you may want to use it rather than using the host computer interface on the CS1x. Otherwise, depending on the computer or interface used, set the HOST SELECT switch to the appropriate setting: MIDI, PC-1 (NEC PC-9800 Series), PC2 (IBM and clones), or Mac (Macintosh). For information on the types of cables that can be used for connection, see the section MIDI/Computer Connecting Cables, at right. MIDI Standard MIDI cable, maximum length 15 meters. Mac Apple Macintosh Peripheral cable (M0197), maximum length 2 meters. HOST SELECT PC-2 PC-1 MIDI Mac Connecting Cables PC-1 TO HOST 8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 25-pin cable, maximum length 1.8 meters. (If your PC-1 type computer has a 9-pin serial port, use the PC-2 type cable.) CS1x Computer PC-2 8-pin MINI DIN to D-SUB 9-pin cable, maximum length 1.8 meters. 10 Switching On The Power And Producing Sound Playing Arpeggiated Chords Take a moment and try out the Arpeggiator function, which creates automatic arpeggios based on the chords you play. First select a Performance with a fast attack, such as a percussive type sound. (Note: The Arpeggiator function only works in Performance mode.) Once all connections have been properly made, you're ready to switch on the power and start having fun with the CS1x. 1. Turn the volume of the CS1x to its minimum position. 1. Press ARPEGGIATOR. An indicator will appear in the lower right area of the LCD. 2. Press the POWER switch, located on the rear panel. 2. Play a chord. The arpeggiated chord will begin playing, based on the Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and Subdivide parameter settings. 3. After a brief greeting message, the CS1x will power up. 4. Gradually turn the VOLUME knob to the right while playing the keyboard until you achieve a comfortable listening level. 3. Change the Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and Subdivide parameters using the Common Edit 1 menu. (See page 22.) Playing The Demo Songs ARPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT + Before you dive in and start exploring the many Performances and other versatile features of the CS1x, you may want to listen to the preprogrammed demonstration song. PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE PRESET USER + The Demo provides a dynamic example of just how powerful the CS1x really is. To play the Demo, perform the following operation: PROGRAM Arpeggiator Hold The handy Arpeggiator Hold function lets you play a chord to start the automatic arpeggio, then take your hand off the keyboard—the arpeggiated chord will play continuously in a loop. Play another chord and the automatic arpeggios will change accordingly. 1. In Performance mode, hold the PERFORMANCE button and press the MULTI button. 2. The word "DEMO" will appear in the LCD, and after a brief moment the Demo song will begin, and continue playing. 3. To stop the Demo, simply press a mode button, such as PERFORMANCE. 1. Hold SHIFT and press ARPEGGIATOR. The Arpeggiator indicator in the LCD will start blinking. 2. Play a series of chords. 3. To stop the arpeggiated chords, press ARPEGGIATOR again. Arpeggiator Split The Arpeggiator Split function greatly increases the performance capability of the CS1x. When Arpeggiator Split is engaged, any chord you play to the left of the split point (B2 and below) will produce an arpeggiated chord, while chords you play to the right of the split point will play normally. DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY When the Demo mode is engaged, you can select a Demo song from the various Demo songs using the numeric keypad. 1. Press ARPEGGIATOR to activate the Arpeggiator function. 2. Set the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch to the Common Edit 1 menu. 3. Hold SHIFT and press the left-most Parameter Value UP/DOWN button (Arpeggiator Type parameter). 11 4. Pressing [UP] will turn on the Arpeggiator Split feature (the letter "S" will display in the LCD); pressing [DOWN] will turn it off. How The CS1x Generates Sound Oscillators, Filters And Amplifiers In order to better understand what's actually happening to the sound as you turn the Sound Control Knobs or modify other parameters, it is helpful to first take a look at the key components which make up the physical nature of sound. Synthesizers rely on three key electronic components to imitate the soundwaves of musical instrument voices, as well as create entirely new sounds. The Nature Of Sound In traditional analog synthesis the source sound pitch is generated by an oscillator, its tone is created by a filter, and its volume is determined by an amplifier. What is sound? If we could see sounds they would look like waves rippling through the air at a constant speed with high frequencies bunched close together and lower frequencies spread far apart. Our ears are naturally designed to take these physical vibrations—or sound waves—moving through the air around us at high, mid and low frequencies, and interpret them as a dog barking across the street, someone practicing a violin next door, a jet airplane screaming overhead, or rock music on the stereo in front of you. OSCILLATORS FILTERS AMPLIFIERS GENERATES PITCH CREATES TONE DETERMINES VOLUME ! The oscillator generates sound wave vibrations at controllable speeds, or frequencies, to create pitch. Synthesizer oscillators usually offer a range of frequencies between 20 Hz and 20kHz, which is the range of the audio spectrum that most human beings can hear. They also usually offer various types of sound waveforms, such as sine, sawtooth, and others. Generating Electronic Sounds " Musical instrument sounds are made up of the basic tone that we clearly distinguish, plus additional harmonics, or overtones which exist at each octave above the basic tone, but that we cannot distinctly hear. The filter provides control over these harmonics. By manipulating the filter's cutoff frequency, which decides where to delete—or cut off—the overtones, and resonance settings, you can thus determine the tone. There are three basic elements which make up a sound: • pitch, or how low or high it is • tone, or what its overall quality is like • amplitude, or how loud its volume level is # An amplifier controls the volume of the tone. An envelope generator (EG) determines the tone's volume over time, through attack, decay, sustain and release settings. Before we take a look at how the CS1x generates and manipulates pitch, tone and amplitude, lets first take a look at how these elements apply naturally to acoustic musical instruments. Acoustic musical instruments are specifically designed and carefully built to produce precise sound characteristics when played—which is why a violin always sounds like a violin, a piano always sounds like a piano, and a flute always sounds like a flute. AWM2 Waveforms The CS1x takes the familiar concepts and functions of analog synthesis and combines them with the state of the art in digital synthesis technology. A musician playing a finely crafted violin will scrape the bow across the string at a certain intensity to generate violin sound waves at a certain volume level (amplitude), and produce low or high notes based on fingering positions (pitch). The vibrating strings and resonating wood, as well as the playing style and technique of the musician, will determine the overall quality of the violin's sound (tone). As such, it has hundreds of AWM2 waveforms, or digital recordings ("samples"), of all types of musical instrument and other sounds programmed right inside—including everything from a violin bow scraping a string, to a mallet striking a marimba, to a breath blowing across a flute mouthpiece. An AWM2 waveform forms the fundamental tone source of a CS1x voice; the rest of the sound is contoured by the oscillator, filter and amplifier settings. CS1x synthesis gives you enormous realtime and other control over detailed aspects of all parameter settings. 12 CS1x Synthesis The secret behind the CS1x's exceptional quality sound is its ability to create rich and complex sonic textures in Performances, which are made up of Layers of up to four AWM2 voices—either sounding simultaneously or mapped to various note and velocity zones across the keyboard. AWM2 WAVEFORM BANK PROGRAM NUMBER AWM2 VOICE OSCILLATORS FILTERS AMPLIFIERS EFFECTS ATTACK LEVEL ( ATK LEVEL ) LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL BASIC KEY PLAYED PITCH INITIAL LEVEL ( INIT LEVEL ) TIME ATTACK TIME ( ATK TIME ) KEY ON DECAY TIME ( DCY TIME ) SUSTAIN LEVEL ( SUS LEVEL ) SUSTAIN LEVEL (SUS LEVEL) CUT OFF FREQUENCY TIME RELEASE TIME RELEASE LEVEL ( REL TIME ) ( REL LEVEL ) ATTACK TIME ( ATK TIME ) KEY OFF KEY ON DECAY TIME ( DCY TIME ) RELEASE TIME ( REL TIME ) KEY OFF VOLUME ATTACK TIME ( ATK TIME ) KEY ON LFO ! AWM2 WAVEFORM - The fundamental source of the CS1x's sound is the sampled AWM2 waveform. There are hundreds preprogrammed in ROM which are used by the Performances. Available waveforms are organized in Banks. Each AWM2 waveform has its own Program Number. " AWM2 VOICE - The AWM2 waveform combines with the oscillator, filter and amplifier to make up a CS1x voice. • PEG - The Pitch Envelope Generator controls how the pitch changes over time. • FEG - The Filter Envelope Generator controls how the timbre changes over time. ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its maximum cutoff frequency level when a note is played. DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from the maximum level while the key is held. SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) sets the Sustain Level; the cutoff frequency will be maintained at this level for as long as the key is held. REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it takes for the cutoff frequency to reach the level preset for each voice after the key has been released. ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its Attack Level after a note is played. • AEG - The Amplitude Envelope Generator controls how the volume changes over time. ATK LEVEL (Attack Level) sets the initially targeted level after a note is played. ATK TIME (Attack Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its maximum volume level when a note is played. REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it takes for the basic pitch to reach the Release Level after the key has been released. REL LEVEL (Release Level) sets the final targeted level after the key is released. RELEASE TIME ( REl TIME ) TIME KEY OFF CONTROLLER INIT LEVEL (Initial Level) sets the initial pitch level when a key is played. DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its basic pitch from the Attack Level while the key is held. DECAY TIME ( DCY TIME ) DCY TIME (Decay Time) determines the time required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from the maximum volume level while the key is held. SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) sets the Sustain Level; the volume will be maintained at this level for as long as the key is held. REL TIME (Release Time) determines the time it 13 takes for a sound to sustain after the key has been released. # LFO - The Low Frequency Oscillator generates low frequency signals which can be used to modulate the PEG, FEG and AEG. • PMOD - The LFO can apply Pitch Modulation to the PEG to create vibrato effects. • FMOD - The LFO can apply Filter Modulation to the FEG to create wah-wah types of effects. • AMOD - The LFO can apply Amplitude Modulation to the AEG to create tremolo effects. $ CONTROLLER - You can use several types of controllers to manipulate various parameters in realtime. • MW - Use the Modulation Wheel to control PMOD, FMOD, and Filter Cutoff. • FC - Use the Foot Controller to control FMOD, Filter Cutoff, and Variation Effect. • Use the Sound Control Knobs to control AEG Attack Time, Release Time, Filter Cutoff, and Resonance. The ASSIGN 1/2 knobs can be specified to control one of any number of parameters. (See the lists on pages 27 and 29.) CS1x MAIN OPERATING MODES The CS1x has two main operating modes: Performance mode and Multi Play mode. The chief distinction between each mode is as follows: AMP EG VOLUME • Performance mode is primarily for realtime performance of Layers. It has six menus of Edit parameters. ATTACK RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA CUTOFF RESONANCE ASSIGN 2 2 MW/FC 1 FILTER • Multi Play mode is primarily for multitimbral playback of up to 16 Parts when external MIDI devices are connected. It has one menu of Edit parameters. You can also use the CS1x as a MIDI data input device for an external sequencer. SCENE Turning the Sound Control Knobs will give you direct access to the AMP EG and FILTER parameters, thus providing analog-style realtime control over key characteristics of the sound. You can also save up to two "snapshots" of knob positions in Scenes, which can be instantly recalled at the touch of a SCENE button. Utility mode lets you modify System and MIDI parameters which affect both Performance and Multi Play mode. (For more information about Utility mode, see page 40.) Another way to edit a Performance is with the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. These give you control over both "Common" parameters which affect all Layer voices equally, and "Layer" parameters which affect individual Layers, or AWM2 voices. Store mode lets you store your own User Performances and Scenes. (For more information about Store mode, see page 44.) Performance Mode Edit Parameter Rotary Switch If you're in a different mode, press the PERFORMANCE button to enter Performance mode. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD BANK PROGRAM CUTOFF REV TYPE CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF EFECT VARI TYPE LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW VARI EF VEL LIMIT OFFSET HIGH SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH TUNE DETUNE NOTE SFT AEG DCY ATK TIME TIME FEG DCY ATK TIME TIME In Performance Play mode you can select a Performance from 128 Preset Performances and 128 User Performances and begin playing. PERFORM LEVEL FMOD NOTE VARI VARI PARAM DATA PORTA SWITCH TIME DEPTH PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO A Performance is comprised of up to four "Layers", or AWM2 voices sounding at once—either playing simultaneously across the length of the keyboard, or playing independently according to specified key and velocity ranges. PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM VEL KBD CURVE TRANS MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL BULK DUMP ASSIGN CTRL NO UTILITY Parameter Value UP/DOWN Buttons In Performance mode there are six Edit menus of Common and Layer parameters which can be accessed via the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and modified with the Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. There are many Performance parameters which you can edit by offsetting parameter values—i.e., adding to or subtracting from the values which are preset for each voice. There are basically two ways to go about offsetting the parameters—by turning the Sound Control Knobs, or using the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Try changing the voice assignments to each Layer. This is a quick and effective way to create an entirely new Performance, which you can easily store as a User Performance. Changing any parameter will automatically engage Performance Edit mode. (You can easily switch back Performance Play mode by pressing the PERFORMANCE button or PROGRAM [–]/[+] button.) Assigning voices to the Layers is simple. Choose the Layer (1~4) with the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons, and select from a variety of AWM2 instrument voices and drum voices using the Bank and Program Parameters (Layer Edit 4, sixth row from the top). 14 Basic Basic Operations In Operations In Performance Performance Mode Mode PERFORMANCE PLAY next to the Performance number, to indicate that the edited sound has not been stored. Performance Play mode lets you select a Preset or User Performance for realtime play. • Offset AMP EG and FILTER parameters to change the shape and tone of the sound as you play by turning the Sound Control Knobs. • Press the PERFORMANCE button to enter Performance mode (if you're in a different mode). • Press either the PRESET or USER button to select the Preset or User Performance bank. • Choose a Performance with the PROGRAM [–]/[+] buttons. • Use realtime control features as you play, including the Pitch Bend and Modulation Wheels. • Transpose the octave up or down by holding SHIFT and pressing PART/LAYER [–]/[+]. You can transpose the pitch up ([+]) or down ([–]) by as many as three octaves, depending on the Performance. (The transpose value will also be reflected in the Utility mode's Keyboard Transpose function. NOTE: Maximum is ±3 octaves; however, when you raise or lower the pitch in semitones, for example, three octaves cannot be achieved using the SHIFT button.) PERFORMANCE EDIT Making any adjustment—either intentionally or inadvertently—to any parameter will engage Performance Edit mode. When exiting from the Performance Edit mode (by pressing PERFORMANCE or PROGRAM [–]/[+]), an "E" will be displayed in the LCD 15 • Replace the Layer voice assignment, or edit other Performance Common and Layer parameters, with the Edit Parameter Rotary Switch and Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. • Press ARPEGGIATOR to turn it ON, and play a chord to start the arpeggiated chords. Select Arpeggiator Type, Tempo and other parameters from the Common Edit 1 menu. STORE Store mode lets you store Scenes as well as User Performances for later recall. • Store your favorite Scenes, or "snapshots" of Sound Control Knob positions, in the currently selected Performance. (See page 44.) • Store your own Performances in the 128 User Performance memories. (See page 44.) Performance Structure Storing User Performances Storing your own User Performance is a quick and simple operation. Preset Bank User Bank 128 Performance 128 Performance 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 1. To store the current Performance, press the STORE button once. 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 2. Choose a User Performance number (1~128) using the numeric keypad. STORE IN USER BANK 3. Press ENTER. 001 Performance COMMON EDIT ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO TYPE P BEND RANGE NOTE SFT SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD PMOD PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF REV TYPE FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF NOTE TUNE DETUNE EFECT VARI TYPE DCY TIME VARI VARI PARAM DATA PORTA SWITCH TIME VARI EF VEL OFFSET LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND ATK LEVEL AEG ATK TIME DEPTH Layer 4 Layer 3 VOICE Layer 2 VOICE Layer 1 PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM A "Sure?" prompt will appear in the LCD. Press YES to store the Performance. Press NO to abort the operation. VOICE VOICE COMMON ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO FEG WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO AMP EG ATTACK RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA CUTOFF RESONANCE ASSIGN 2 DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY LAYER EDIT MASTER TUNE SYSTEM VEL KBD TRANS CURVE VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL 2 MW/FC BULK DUMP ASSIGN CTRL NO UTILITY 1 FILTER SCENE SAVE AS SCENE 1 or 2 REAL TIME EDIT with THE SOUND CONTROL KNOBS ! PERFORMANCE BANKS - The CS1x comes preprogrammed with 128 Preset Performances and 128 User Performances. You can edit the Layers of the currently selected Performance and store it in a User Performance. Scenes " LAYERS - A Performance consists of up to four Layers—each Layer can be assigned its own AWM2 voice. There are many Layer and Common Performance parameters which can be edited. There are two "Scene" memories dedicated to each Performance. Scenes are simply "snapshots" of specific positions of the Sound Control Knobs— instantly accessible via the SCENE buttons. # AMP EG/FILTER - Turning the Sound Control Knobs will affect all Layers equally by offsetting AMP EG parameters to control the shape of the volume of the sound over time, and FILTER parameters to control the quality of the tone. In Edit mode you can assign which parameters the ASSIGN 1 and ASSIGN 2 knobs will control. You can select one of the Scenes by pressing the SCENE 1 or SCENE 2 button. Or you can hold one SCENE button and press the other, then use the Modulation Wheel or Foot Controller for realtime continuous parameter changes between one Scene and the other. The default controller is Modulation Wheel. The minimum position of the controller is Scene1, and the maximum position is Scene 2. $ COMMON EDIT 1~2 - These are "Common" parameters which affect all Layers in the Performance equally. Storing Scenes You can easily store your own Scenes in a Performance—either temporarily or permanently. % LAYER EDIT 1~4 - These are "Layer" parameters which let you modify the characteristics of each individual Layer. Select the Layer you want to edit using the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons. To store a Scene temporarily in the currently selected Performance, hold a SCENE button and press STORE. This will store the Scene in the edit buffer as long as the current Performance is selected, so that the original Scenes are protected. If you select another Performance, any new Scenes will be lost. To store a Scene permanently in a Performance, simply perform the Store operation for User Performances. (See Storing User Performances, above.) 16 Multi Play Mode insert voice Program Change messages at the head of your sequences, however, the right Part voices will always be selected automatically when you start your sequencer from the beginning of the song.) In Multi Play mode you can select a voice from the GM bank of 128 AWM2 voices (accessible via the PROGRAM [–]/[+] buttons) and start playing in realtime. MULTITIMBRAL PLAY - As a GM- and XG-compatible multitimbral MIDI tone generator, the CS1x can receive note and other data on each of the 16 MIDI channels, sent from an external sequencer or computer, thus playing the corresponding 16 Parts. Multi Play mode lets you use the CS1x as a master keyboard controller or MIDI note data input device, as well as a multitimbral tone generator. A Multi is a configuration of up to 16 instrument "Parts" (each Part is assigned to a MIDI channel) which can be played simultaneously when an external sequencer or computer is connected to the CS1x. XG Operation The CS1x is a fully equipped, stand-alone XG-MIDI tone generator, featuring a total of 480 normal voices and 11 drum voices. Choose the Part with the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons, and assign a voice to it by selecting from the 480 GM- and XG-compatible AWM2 normal (instrument) voices and 11 drum voices (kits), using the Edit menu Bank and Program Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. The XG format maintains the universality and compatibility of the MIDI and General MIDI System Level 1 standards, while significantly increasing the range of expressiveness through much greater control over voice modifications and effects. In Multi Play mode there is one menu of Edit parameters which can be accessed via the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. In addition to supporting the 128 GM voices, the XG format provides for Bank Select messages that significantly expand the number of voices available for use. Turning the Sound Control Knobs will affect only a single AWM2 voice, i.e., the currently selected Part. Many of the new XG voices are variations of basic GM voices which are stored in additional banks. Each bank is associated with a specific type of variation, so that voices are easy to locate. When using an external sequencer to control the CS1x, additional banks are selected by the appropriate Bank-Select LSB values. Multi Structure Part 1~16 7 6 5 4 3 BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN EFFECT FILTER POLY/MONO The XG format also supports a full SFX bank of extension effects, which are selected by a Bank-Select MSB value of 40H. Bank-Select MSB 7H, in contrast, can be used to set any channel to rhythm-part play. The XG format allows creation of extremely expressive control data which can change a voice's Harmonic Contents, Brightness, and many more critical Control Change and other parameters. 2 1 PART SELECT The XG format also offers high level effects support, enabling control of effects types, circuit operation, plus internal parameter settings for both basic and elaborate effects. This means you can freely control the parameters of the CS1x's 11 Reverb, 11 Chorus and 43 Variation types of effects independently. PART SELECT - In Multi Play mode each "Part" is made up of an AWM2 voice. You can select and play any of the 16 Parts by pressing the PART/ LAYER [–]/[+] buttons. Since the notes you play on the keyboard and the buttons you press on the panel are sending MIDI messages, the CS1x is ideal as a MIDI input device. (For more information about MIDI related parameters, see the Appendix, page 53.) The CS1x also features another play mode —TG300B mode— which lets you play back commercially available MIDI files in this format. EDITING PARTS - Select the Part you want to edit using the PART/LAYER [–]/[+] buttons. Each of the Multi parameters are printed above the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. To set up your own 16 Parts, assign a voice to the Part using the Bank and Program parameters accessible by the first two Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. (Note that these settings will not be retained when the power is turned off, since the XG default parameters are always reinstated when the power is turned on. If you 17 18 Following is a description of each function in the various modes. In Performance mode you can choose from 128 Preset and 128 User Performances. A Performance consists of a maximum of four layered sounds (voices). The Performance Edit function lets you easily edit each Layer within a Performance. The various parameters give you the flexibility to create a vast variety of sounds. Entering Performance Mode ● Selecting a Performance Press the PERFORMANCE button. A [▲] mark will appear in the LCD below the word "PERFORMANCE". 1. Use the numeric keypad (0 ~ 9) to select the Performance number you want. PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY DEMO ERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY *& VWX YZ' 7 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 3 ABC PRESET USER ARPEGGIATOR SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC Performance Play Mode YES NOTE For more information about each Performance, see the Performance List in the "Data List" book. ● Selecting a Bank 2. Press the ENTER button to confirm the Performance number (1~128). The Performance name and number you have selected will display in the LCD. The Category name will be shown next to the Performance name. There are 2 banks, a Preset bank and a User bank. Each bank contains 128 Performances. Preset Bank 128 Performance 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 User Bank 128 Performance Category 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 Performance Name VWX Press the PRESET button or the USER button to select the bank you want. A [▼] mark will appear in the LCD above the word "PRESET" or "USER". RPEGGIO HOLD *& 7 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 3 ABC SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC YES Performance Number Press the PROGRAM [+] button to select the next Performance number. Press the PROGRAM [-] button to select the previous Performance number. SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE PRESET YZ' USER + PROGRAM ARPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE RPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT PRESET USER + + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE PRESET PROGRAM USER + PROGRAM 20 ● Edit Procedure Quick Program Change Press the QUICK PC (Quick Program Change) button in the numeric keypad to fix all the numbers except the first digit of the Performance number in the LCD. By pressing a button in the numeric keypad (0~9), you can quickly select the Performance numbers within a group of ten by changing the first digit of the Performance number. The hundredth and tenth digits will be shown as bold characters to indicate they are fixed. This lets you quickly switch between ten types of Performances during a live performance. To cancel the function, press the QUICK PC button again. 1. Select the Edit function. Turn the Edit Parameter Rotary switch to choose the Common or Layer Edit menu with the parameter you want to edit. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD NOTE SFT SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE DETUNE PERFORM LEVEL FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF REV TYPE CUTOFF NOTE LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH EFECT VARI TYPE VEL OFFSET 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH WAVE PHASE INIT SPEED PEG *& YZ' 7 DEPTH AEG ATK TIME FEG VWX PERFORM NAME VARI VARI DATA PARAM PORTA TIME SWITCH VARI EF VARI SEND LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM VEL KBD CURVE TRANS MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL ASSIGN CTRL NO BULK DUMP UTILITY 3 ABC SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC 2. Select a Layer (if you want to change the Layer parameters). YES Use the LAYER [-]/[+] buttons to select the Layer you want to edit. NOTE You can also use the Quick Program Change function when selecting the program number for each Part in Multi Play mode (page 36). ARPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE Performance Edit Mode PRESET USER + PROGRAM You can edit any Preset or User Performance to create your own unique Performance by changing the various parameters, including the voice assignment to each Layer. You can then store the Performance you have edited in a User Performance number (1~128). NOTE You do not need to select a Layer if you are editing the Common parameters, since these are applied equally to all Layers in a Performance. 3. Select a parameter. Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to the parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter. The current settings will display in the LCD. NOTE Changing any parameter in a Performance will automatically engage Performance Edit mode. Preset Bank User Bank 128 Performance 128 Performance 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 007 006 005 004 003 002 001 TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD NOTE SFT PERFORM LEVEL SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE DETUNE CUTOFF REV TYPE FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF NOTE EFECT VARI TYPE VA PAR SW VARI EF VEL OFFSET LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK LEVEL D T VARI SEND CU DE AEG LFO ATK TIME DCY TIME ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH FEG Store into a Performance 001 Performance Layer 4 Layer 3 VOICE Layer 2 VOICE Layer 1 TYPE P BEND RANGE PMOD SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE DETUNE PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF REV TYPE FMOD EFECT VARI TYPE CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF NOTE LIMIT HIGH VEL OFFSET LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND ATK LEVEL BANK NOTE SFT VARI VARI PARAM DATA PORTA SWITCH TIME VARI EF DEPTH AEG ATK TIME DCY TIME WAVE ASSIGN2 PARAM DATA SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY COMMON LFO FEG SYSTEM VEL KBD CURVE TRANS LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO MASTER TUNE AMP EG ATTACK RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA CUTOFF RESONANCE ASSIGN 2 MIDI DEVICE NO LO LAYER EDIT DEMO PERFORMANCE PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM DEMO VOICE VOICE COMMON EDIT ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO W PEG MULTI 2 STORE MW/FC UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM KBD VEL CURVE TRANS VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL BULK DUMP ASSIGN CTRL NO UTILITY 1 FILTER SCENE 4. Set the value. Realtime edit with Sound Control Knobs Select SCENE 1/2 Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the value. Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes the value continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and the [DOWN] button decreases the value. NOTE Edit parameters are basically divided into two groups: Common parameters equally applied to all the Layers in a Performance, and Layer parameters independently set for each Layer in a Performance. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD NOTE SFT SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE DETUNE PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF REV TYPE FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF NOTE EFECT VARI TYPE P S VARI EF VEL OFFSET LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK LEVEL D AEG LFO ATK TIME DCY TIME ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH FEG PEG VARI SEND DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE 21 SYSTEM VEL KBD CURVE TRANS MIDI DEVICE NO C NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data Entry knob to change the value. NOTE To exit Performance Edit mode, press the PERFORMANCE button again or the PROGRAM [-]/[+] button. You can enter Multi Play mode directly from Performance mode by pressing the MULTI button. NOTE To change the value for all four Layers at one time, hold SHIFT and press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. When you press SHIFT in Performance Edit mode, a letter "A" (All) will appear in the LCD below the word "LAYER". TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD Edit Mark Once you have edited a Performance in any way, an edit mark (a reversed type letter "E") will appear to the left of the Performance number. This mark indicates you have edited, but not stored the Performance. D NOTE SFT ARPEGGIO HOLD L AEG SHIFT + ATK TIME DCY TIME ATK TIME DCY TIME L BANK PROGRAM VO L FEG PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE PRESET F TUNE DETUNE USER + PROGRAM DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY Indicates you have edited, but not stored the Performance. MASTER TUNE SYSTEM KBD C TRANS NOTE The edit mark will also appear simply by making a slight position change to a Sound Control Knob (see page 6). ● Description of Each Function Common Edit 1 (applied to all Layers) This row provides functions and parameters which are common to all Layers in a Performance, such as the Arpeggiator, and the Performance Level, Effect and Name. NOTE Each voice is preset with optimum settings for the parameters, and the value you set for any parameter will offset (add or subtract) the preset value. If the value of a parameter exceeds the maximum or minimum limit available, the highest or lowest value will be used. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD NOTE SFT NOTE The actual value is the sum of the value displayed in the LCD and the value set by the Sound Control Knob. SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE DETUNE PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF FMOD REV TYPE CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF NOTE LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH EFECT VARI TYPE VEL OFFSET DEPTH PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON ASSIGN2 PARAM DATA LFO AEG ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG FEG NOTE VARI VARI DATA PARAM PORTA TIME SWITCH VARI EF VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO The original voice can be restored and heard by returning to Performance Play mode and moving the Sound Control Knob to the center position. PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN ■ ARPEGGIATOR NOTE You can replace the voices currently assigned to each Layer with new voices or assign a voice to an empty Layer (up to four voices/Layers for a Performance). The Arpeggiator automatically creates arpeggiated chords based on the chords/melodies you play on the keyboard. There are three Arpeggiator parameters: TYPE, TEMPO and SUBDIVIDE. 5. Set the other parameters. As you continue pressing the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons, the other parameters will appear in the display. Set the other parameters to your preference. TYPE 6. Store the Performance. When you have finished editing, store the Performance as a User Performance. For details about how to store a Performance, see page 44. SUBDIVIDE NOTE The edited contents will be retained in memory even if you turn the power off during an edit. The Performance you were editing will still be selected the next time you turn the power on, and you will be able to pick up from where you left off and continue editing the Performance. While editing a Performance, if you select another Performance or press the PERFORMANCE button again to exit Performance Edit mode before you have first stored the data as a User Performance, your edited data will be lost. For details about storing a User Performance, see page 44. 22 TEMPO ■ PERFORM LEVEL To start the Arpeggiator, press the ARPEGGIATOR button to turn it on. A [▼ ] mark will appear in the LCD above the word "ARPEGGIATOR". NOTE This sets the volume of each Performance. To turn the Arpeggiator off, press the ARPEGGIATOR button again. TYPE: Sets the type of arpeggio. You can choose from 30 types. For details about each type, see the Arpeggiator Type List in the "Data List" book. Settings: PERFORM LEVEL (Performance Level): 0~127 Arpeggiator Hold The Arpeggiator Hold function lets you play a chord to start the automatic arpeggio, then take your hand off the keyboard; the arpeggiated chord will play continuously in a loop. Play another chord and the automatic arpeggios will change accordingly. ■ EFFECT There are five effect parameters: REV TYPE (Reverb Type), CHO TYPE (Chorus Type), VARI TYPE (Variation Type), VARI PARAM (Variation Parameter) and VARI DATA (Variation Data). For more basic information on each effect, see page 47. To activate the Arpeggiator Hold function, perform the following: 1. Hold SHIFT and press ARPEGGIATOR. The Arpeggiator indicator in the LCD will start blinking. 2.Play a series of chords. Reverb Type Chorus Type Variation Type Variation Parameter 3.To stop the arpeggiated chords, press ARPEGGIATOR again. Arpeggiator Split If you hold SHIFT and press the Parameter Value [UP] button when the TYPE parameter is displayed in the LCD, the Arpeggiator Split function will be enabled, and a reversed type letter "S" will appear to the right of the Arpeggiator type. The Split function splits the keyboard from C3 (indicated above the keyboard with [▼]) and will allow you to play the arpeggiated chords on the lower half (below C3) of the keyboard, and play a melody line on the upper half (C3 and above). To cancel the Split function, hold SHIFT and press the Parameter Value [DOWN] button. Variation Data TEMPO: Sets the tempo of the Arpeggiator. The range is MIDI, 40 ~ 240. The letter "P" (Parameter) or "d" (Data) displays to distinguish between the Variation Parameter and Variation Data screens. Settings: TEMPO: MIDI, 40 ~ 240 (beats per minute) NOTE If you want to synchronize the tempo of the Arpeggiator with that of an external MIDI device, set the TEMPO parameter to MIDI. REV TYPE (Reverb Type): Sets the Reverb type. You can choose from 11 types. For more information about each Reverb type, see Effect Type List on page 49. SUBDIVIDE: Determines the basic note settings (how fine the tempo is divided) of the Arpeggiator. Settings: SUBDIVIDE: 3/8= 1/12= , 1/16= NOTE , 1/4= , 3/16= , 1/6= , 1/24= , 1/32= , 1/8= , 3/32= CHO TYPE (Chorus Type): Sets the Chorus type. You can choose from 11 types. For more information about each Chorus type, see Effect Type List on page 49. , VARI TYPE (Variation Type): Sets the Variation effect type. There are 43 types to choose from. For more information about each Variation effect type, see Effect Type List on page 49. The Arpeggiator data cannot be output as the MIDI messages. VARI PARAM (Variation Parameter): Selects the Variation effect parameters. Parameters will differ depending on the Variation effect type selected in VARI TYPE. 23 ■ PERFORM NAME (Performance Name) NOTE If you select EFFECT OFF in the Variation Type menu, the layers which have the VARI SEND function set to ON will not sound. When you don't want to use the Variation Effect on the layers, set VARI TYPE to Thru. This lets you select the Category and name the User Performances using up to eight letters, numbers, symbols and characters. 1. Use the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to move the cursor to the position at which you want to enter a character. NOTE Variation effect works as an Insertion effect in Performance mode. For more information, see page 47. For more information about each Variation effect parameter, see Effect Parameter List on page 49. 2. Move the cursor left-most if necessary (the word "Category" will appear instead of the Performance name) and use the numeric keypad (0~9) to select the Category. VARI DATA (Variation Data): Sets the data (value) of the Variation effect parameter selected in VARI PARAM. For more information about each Variation effect data, see the Effect Data Assign Table on page 51. # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 NOTE When VARI TYPE is turned off, VARI PARAM and VARI DATA will be disabled. NOTE The effect depth and other parameters can be controlled using the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or a Foot Controller. For details, see page 26. NOTE For more information, see page 47. LCD -Pf Cp Or Gt Ba St En Br Rd Pi Ld Pd Fx Et Pc Se Dr Sc Vo Co Wv Sq Category Name Not specified Piano Chromatic Percussion Organ Guitar Bass Strings/Orchestral Ensemble Brass Reed Pipe Synth Lead Synth Pad Synth SFX Ethnic Percussive Sound Effect Drums Synth Comping Vocal Combination Material Wave Sequence 3. Move the cursor one position to the right (the current cursor position will start blinking) and use the numeric keypad (0~9) to select the first letter, then right one position more and select the second letter, etc., until you complete your Performance name. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF TUNE NOTE LIMIT NOTE DETUNE LOW SFT AEG SUS ATK DCY LEVEL TIME TIME FEG SUS ATK DCY LEVEL TIME TIME BANK PROGRAM VOLUME REV TYPE FMOD CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF EFECT VARI TYPE VARI VARI DATA PARAM PORTA TIME SWITCH VARI EF LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW VEL LIMIT OFFSET HIGH REL TIME AMOD PMOD DEPTH PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO FMOD WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG REL TIME INIT LEVEL PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH ATK LEVEL VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM VEL KBD CURVE TRANS MIDI DEVICE NO LOCAL BULK DUMP ASSIGN CTRL NO UTILITY Settings: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ'abcdefg hijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789-/.,*&_ (space) 24 Common Edit 2 (applied to all Layers) ■ MW (Modulation Wheel) This row provides functions and parameters which are common to all Layers in a Performance (except for "Portament"), including the settings for realtime controllers such as the Pitch Wheel, Modulation Wheel and Foot Controller. This sets the control parameters of the Modulation Wheel. There are three parameters: PMOD (Pitch Modulation), FMOD (Filter Modulation) and CUTOFF (Cutoff). The parameters set here can be controlled with the Modulation Wheel to add vibrato or tremolo effects to the sound. TYPE ARPEGGIATOR TEMPO P BEND RANGE PMOD SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD TUNE NOTE DETUNE SFT AEG ATK DCY TIME TIME FEG ATK DCY TIME TIME BANK PROGRAM PERFORM LEVEL CUTOFF REV TYPE FMOD NOTE CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF EFECT VARI TYPE VARI VARI PARAM DATA PORTA SWITCH TIME VARI EF LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW VEL LIMIT OFFSET HIGH DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND ATK LEVEL VOLUME DEPTH PERFORM NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM COMMON Pitch Modulation ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM Filter Modulation LFO WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY ■ P BEND RANGE (Pitch Bend Range) Cutoff This sets the Pitch Bend range in semitones. The pitch can be bent up or down within the range set here by moving the Pitch Wheel. PMOD (Pitch Modulation): Sets the pitch modulation depth created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here will determine the range of the pitch modulation by the Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up will increase the depth of the pitch modulation, while moving it down will decrease the depth. Settings: -24 ~ +24 semitones FMOD (Filter Modulation): Sets the filter modulation depth created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here will determine the range of the filter modulation by the Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up will increase the depth of the filter modulation, while moving it down will decrease the depth. CUTOFF (Cutoff): Sets the range of the cutoff frequency points above which the other frequencies are cut off. The value set here will determine the range of the cutoff frequency points when using the Modulation Wheel. Moving the Modulation Wheel up will raise the cutoff frequency point (i.e., make the voice brighter), while moving it down will lower the cutoff point (i.e., make the voice darker). Settings: PMOD (Pitch Modulation): 0~127 FMOD (Filter Modulation): 0~127 CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63 25 ■ FC (Foot Control) ■ PORTA (Portamento) This sets the parameters controlled by a Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel. There are three parameters: FMOD (Filter Modulation), CUTOFF, and VARI EF (Variation Effect). This sets the Portamento function. Portamento continuously changes the pitch from one note to the next, thus letting you glide the pitch from one note to the next. There are two parameters, SWITCH and TIME. Values can be set for each Layer. Filter Modulation Switch Cutoff Time Variation Effect SWITCH: Turns the Portamento on or off. (for each layer) TIME: Sets the time it takes for the pitch to reach the next note played. (for all layers) Settings: SWITCH: on, off TIME: 0~127 FMOD (Filter Modulation): Sets the filter modulation depth created by the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The value set here will determine the range of the filter modulation by the Foot Controller. Pressing the Foot Controller will increase the depth of the filter modulation. ■ ASSIGN1 PARAM (ASSIGN 1 Parameter) This determines which parameter will be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob. You can choose from 28 types of parameters. CUTOFF: Sets the range of the cutoff frequency points above which other frequencies are cut off. The value set here will determine the range of the cutoff frequency points by the Foot Controller. Pressing the Foot Controller will raise the cutoff frequency point (i.e., make the voice brighter). The parameter assigned to the ASSIGN1 knob as the default differs depending on the Performance selected. VARI EF (Variation Effect): Determines the Variation effect range set by the EFFECT parameters (page 23), controlled by the Foot Controller. NOTE For details about which parameters the Foot Controller can control, see the Effect Parameter List on page 49. Settings: For details about each parameter, see the reference pages as listed on the next page. Settings: FMOD (Filter Modulation): 0~127 CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63 VARI EF (Variation Effect): -64 ~ +63 26 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 ■ TUNE LCD off PerfLevel (Performance Level) (page 23) ArpgTempo (Arpeggiator Tempo) (page 23) ArpgType (Arpeggiator Type) (page 23) ArpgSubdiv (Arpeggiator Subdivide) (page 23) MWCutoff (MW Cutoff) (page 25) MWPModDpth (MW Pitch Modulation Depth) (page 25) MWFModDpth (MW Filter Modulation Depth) (page 25) PBRange (Pitch Bend Range) (page 25) FCCutoff (FC Cutoff) (page 26) FCFModDpth (FC Filter Modulation Depth) (page 26) FCVariDpth (FC Variation Depth) (page 26) PortaTime (Portamento Time) (page 26) *FEGDcyTime (FEG Decay Time) (page 32) *AEGDcyTime (AEG Decay Time) (page 30) *ChoToRev (Chorus Send To Reverb) *VariCntrl (Variation Control) *RevChoSend (Reverb And Chorus Send) *ChorusSend (Chorus Send) (page 38) *ReverbSend (Reverb Send) (page 38) *Pan (page 38) *LFOSpeed (LFO Speed) (page 31) *LFOPMod (Vibrato Depth) (page 30) *VibDelay (Vibrato Delay) *LFOAMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) (page 30) *LFOFMod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) (page 31) *FEGAtkTime (FEG Attack Time) (page 32) *FEGSusLvl (FEG Sustain Level) (page 32) *FEGVelSens (FEG Level Velocity Sensitivity) *Pitch (Oscillator Pitch) This sets the tuning of a Layer. There are two parameters, NOTE SFT (Note Shift) and DETUNE. Note Shift Detune NOTE SFT (Note Shift): Raises or lowers the pitch of the voice in semitones. Settings: -24 ~ +24 (semitones) DETUNE: Raises or lowers the pitch of the voice in fine increments or decrements (0.1 Hz each). Settings: -12.8 Hz ~ +12.7 Hz Parameters with an asterisk affect entire Layers in a Performance. You cannot directly edit them from the LCD, but you can assign them to the ASSIGN 1 knob. ■ NOTE This sets the range of notes that each Layer will play. There are two parameters, LIMIT LOW and LIMIT HIGH. You can also select each parameter by inputting the corresponding number using the numeric keypad. Limit Low Limit High Layer Edit 1 (independently applied to each Layer) The functions in this row provide various parameters mainly related to the keyboard such as Tune, Note Limit and Velocity. The parameters can be set for each Layer in a Performance. NOTE SFT TUNE DETUNE NOTE LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH VEL OFFSET AEG DEPTH LIMIT LOW: Determines the low note limit, or the lowest note that will be played by the voice. ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND FEG WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO LIMIT HIGH: Determines the high note limit, or the highest note that will be played by the voice. DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY C-2 • • • C1 0 • • • 36 Note Name Note Number C2 C3 C4 C5 C6 • • • G8 48 60 72 84 96 • • • 127 LIMIT LOW is set to C2 and LIMIT HIGH is set to C4. Range of notes that can be played. CS1x Keyboard Settings: LIMIT LOW: C-2 ~ G8 LIMIT HIGH: C-2 ~ G8 NOTE It is not possible to set the LIMIT LOW note above the LIMIT HIGH note, or the LIMIT HIGH note below the LIMIT LOW note. 27 ■ VEL (Velocity) OFFSET: Sets the offset value of the velocity. The value set here will be added to or subtracted from the actual velocity value. This determines the velocity settings for the voice in each Layer. There are four parameters: LIMIT LOW, LIMIT HIGH, OFFSET and DEPTH. Limit Low VELOCITY OFFSET GRAPH ( When DEPTH = 64) VELOCITY LEVEL RECEIVED BY TONE GENERATOR Limit High OFFSET=63 DEPTH=64 VELOCITY=127 Range determined by offset OFFSET=0 DEPTH=64 Range determined by offset OFFSET=-64 DEPTH=64 (OFFSET=63) Offset Depth (OFFSET=0) VELOCITY RECEIVED VELOCITY=1 OFFSET=-64 Settings: OFFSET: -64 ~ +63 LIMIT LOW: Determines the lowest velocity value that will be detected when the keyboard is played. No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played with a velocity value weaker than the one set here. DEPTH: Sets the depth of the velocity. The larger the value, the more sensitive the velocity will be, and playing the keyboard will produce louder sounds. LIMIT HIGH: Determines the highest velocity value that will be detected when the keyboard is played. No sound will be produced if the keyboard is played with a velocity value stronger than the one set here. VELOCITY DEPTH GRAPH (When OFFSET=64) VOLUME DEPTH=96, OFFSET=64 VOLUME DEPTH=64 OFFSET=63 DEPTH=32 OFFSET=63 0 30 100 VELOCITY (Playing Strength) 127 OFFSET=63 DEPTH=0, OFFSET=63 VELOCITY RECEIVED When LIMIT LOW is set to "30" and LIMIT HIGH is set to "100" Velocity range that can be played is limited as shown in the illustration. Settings: DEPTH: 0~127 Settings: LIMIT LOW: 1~127 LIMIT HIGH: 1~127 NOTE It is not possible to set the LIMIT LOW note above the LIMIT HIGH note, or the LIMIT HIGH note below the LIMIT LOW note. 28 ■ ASSIGN2 # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 This sets the control parameter and knob sensitivity of the ASSIGN 2 Sound Control Knob. It is possible to assign up to four parameters from 28 types. It is also possible to set the sensitivity (control range of the knob) for each parameter. The parameter assigned to the ASSIGN2 knob as the default differs depending on the Performance selected. 1. Select the Layer. Press the LAYER [-]/[+] button to select the Layer to which you want to assign a parameter. 2. Select the item (parameter type or sensitivity) you want to edit and the assignment number which you want to assign the parameter to. Press the Parameter Value [UP] button to select the item (parameter type or sensitivity) you want to edit, and the assignment number. Each time you press the (PARAM) Parameter Value [UP] button, the arrow cursor will move as shown in the following illustration. LCD off Volume (page 33) NoteShift (page 27) Detune (page 27) Pan (page 34) ChorusSend (page 38) ReverbSend (page 38) *Pitch (Oscillator Pitch) VelSnsDpth (Velocity Sensitivity Depth) (page 28) VelSnsOfst (Velocity Sensitivity Offset) (page 28) Cutoff (Filter Cuttoff Frequency) (page 34) Resonance (page 34) AEGAtkTime (AEG Attack Time) (page 30) AEGDcyTime (AEG Decay Time) (page 30) AEGSusLvl (AEG Sustain Level) (page 30) AEGRelTime (AEG Release Time) (page 30) LFOSpeed (LFO Speed) (page 31) LFOAMod (LFO Amplitude Modulation Depth) (page 30) LFOPMod (LFO Pitch Modulation Depth) (page 30) LFOFMod (LFO Filter Modulation Depth) (page 31) FEGAtkTime (FEG Attack Time) (page 32) FEGDcyTime (FEG Decay Time) (page 32) FEGSusLvl (FEG Sustain Level) (page 32) FEGRelTime (FEG Release Time) (page 32) PEGInitLvl (PEG Initial Level) (page 32) PEGAtkTime (PEG Attack Time) (page 32) PEGAtkLvl (PEG Attack Level) (page 32) PEGDcyTime (PEG Decay Time) (page 32) PEGRelTime (PEG Release Time) (page 32) PEGRelLvl (PEG Release Level) (page 32) Parameter Type Parameter with an asterisk cannot be modified, but you can assign it to the ASSIGN2 knob. Layer Each parameter can also be selected by inputting the number with the numeric keypad. Sensitivity 4. Press the (PARAM) Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to move the arrow cursor to the sensitivity area. Assignment Number Parameter type of assignment number 1 Sensitivity of assignment number 1 Parameter type of assignment number 2 Sensitivity of assignment number 2 Parameter type of assignment number 3 Sensitivity of assignment number 3 Parameter type of assignment number 4 Sensitivity of assignment number 4 ▲ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ ▼ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ ↑ 5. Press the (DATA) Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to set the knob sensitivity. Settings: Parameters can be set between -32 and +32, for assignment numbers 1 ~ 4. NOTE As an example, say you have selected the Volume parameter and set the knob sensitivity to the positive value "+32". The volume is "0" when the knob is turned counter-clockwise to the far left, and "127" when the knob is turned clockwise to the far right. If the knob sensitivity is set to the negative value "-32", the volume is "127" when the knob is turned to the far left and "0" when the knob is turned to the far right. If the sensitivity value is small, the control range of the knob will be narrowed and limited. Each time you press the (PARAM) Parameter [DOWN] button, the arrow cursor will move in the opposite direction. 3. Move the cursor to the Parameter type area and press the (DATA) Parameter UP/DOWN button to select the parameter type. Settings: The following parameters can be assigned to assignment number 1 ~ 4. For details about each parameter, see the reference pages as listed below. 6. Repeat the above steps to set a different parameter/knob sensitivity value to each of the four assignment numbers. NOTE When the PARAM screen is displayed, you can select the parameter type or change the sensivity using the Data Entry knob or the numeric keypad. NOTE When voices are not assigned to the Layers (Bank=Off), Parameter type and sensitivity will not display. 29 Layer Edit 2 (independently applied to each Layer) VOLUME The functions in this row provide parameters which are essential in creating a voice, such as AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) and LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The parameters can be set for each Layer in a Performance. SUS LEVEL TIME AEG ATK TIME DCY TIME LFO ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD ATK TIME DCY TIME DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND FEG WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LAYER REL TIME Key On REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO Key Off DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM MIDI Settings: ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63 DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63 SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): -64 ~ +63 REL TIME (ReleaseTime): -63 ~ +63 ASSIGN ■ AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator) This sets the AEG (Amplitude Envelope Generator). The AEG lets you shape how the volume level changes over time, from when a key is hit, then released, and how the sound decays. There are four parameters: ATK TIME (Attack Time), DCY TIME (Decay Time), SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) and REL TIME (Release Time). ■ LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) This sets the parameters for the LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator). The LFO is an oscillator that generates low frequency signals used to modulate certain aspects of the sound such as pitch, volume or filter level. There are six parameters: AMOD (Amplitude Modulation), PMOD (Pitch Modulation), FMOD (Filter Modulation), WAVE, SPEED and PHASE INIT. NOTE Each musical instrument has a unique envelope curve which plays an important role in determining its sound characteristics. The AEG simulates the change of the volume envelope curve over time. NOTE Depending on the voice selected, changing certain parameters may not produce a noticeable effect. Attack Time Sustain Level Amplitude Modulation Pitch Modulation Filter Modulation Wave Speed Phase Init Decay Time Release Time ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its maximum volume level when a note is played. DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from a maximum volume level while the key is held. AMOD (Amplitude Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the volume level by applying LFO frequency modulations, to create a tremolo effect. Larger values widen the range of the volume change. SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): Sets the Sustain Level. The volume will be maintained at this level for as long as the key is held. PMOD (Pitch Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the pitch by applying LFO frequency modulations, to create a vibrato effect. Larger values widen the range of the pitch change. REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for a sound to sustain after the key has been released. 30 FMOD (Filter Modulation): Adds a cyclical change to the filter cutoff frequency by applying LFO frequency modulations, to create wah-wah type effects. Larger values widen the range of cutoff frequency change. Settings: AMOD (Amplitude Modulation): -31 ~ +31 PMOD (Pitch Modulation): -63 ~ +63 FMOD (Filter Modulation): -15 ~ +15 WAVE: Saw, Tri , S&HTr, Elem SPEED: -63 ~ +63 PHASE INIT: Free, Retr, Elem WAVE: Selects the LFO frequency signal used for modulation. You can select from the following types: Layer Edit 3 (independently applied to each Layer) Saw (Sawtooth) TIME Tri (Triangle) TIME S&HTr (Sample & Hold = random) TIME The functions in this row provide parameters which are essential in creating a voice, such as FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) or PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator). The parameters can be set for each Layer in a Performance. FEG *S&HTr = Adds random changes to the pitch. (NOTE: Triangle waves will be applied for the AMOD and FMOD. Triangle wave is applied even if you select S&HTr for PMOD, when controlling the PMOD with the Modulation Wheel.) LAYER PEG ATK TIME DCY TIME SUS LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND ATK LEVEL VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN ELEM (Element) *Default settings of each element depending on the selected voice. ■ FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) This sets the FEG (Filter Envelope Generator). The FEG lets you shape how the tone, or timbre, of the voice changes over time, from when a key is hit, then released, and how the sound decays. There are four parameters: ATK TIME (Attack Time), DCY TIME (Decay Time), SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level) and REL TIME (Release Time). SPEED: Sets the speed of the LFO frequency modulation. Larger values increase the speed. SLOW TIME NOTE Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals within a specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below the specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the signals above it (see page 34). The FEG simulates the change of the filter envelope curve over time. FAST TIME PHASE INIT: Determines if the phase of the LFO frequency modulation wave is reset or not when a note is played. There are three types: Free, Retr (Retrigger) and Elem (Element). NOTE Depending on the voice selected, changing certain parameters may not produce a noticeable effect. Free: The wave starts at the phase position where a note is played. + Phase when keyboard is played 0 TIME – KEY ON Retr (Retrigger): The wave starts at +/-0 phase position. + 0 TIME – KEY ON Elem (Element): The wave starts from the default phase position (Free or Retr) for each element of the voices. 31 Attack Time ■ PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) Decay Time This sets the PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator). The PEG lets you shape how the pitch of the voice changes over time, from when a key is hit, then released, and how the sound decays. There are six parameters: INIT LEVEL (Initial Level), ATK TIME (Attack Time), ATK LEVEL (Attack Level), DCY TIME (Decay Time), REL TIME (Release Time) and REL LEVEL (Release Level). Sustain Level Release Time NOTE Since the PEG simulates the change of the pitch envelope curve over time, you can create an SFX type effect and the slight pitch change of a wind instrument. NOTE Depending on the voice selected, changing certain parameters may not produce a noticeable effect. ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its maximum cutoff frequency level when a note is played. DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its Sustain Level from a maximum level while the key is held. Initial Level Attack Time Attack Level Decay Time Release Time Release Level SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): Sets the Sustain Level. The cutoff frequency will be maintained at this level for as long as the key is held. REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for the cutoff frequency to reach the level preset for each voice after the key has been released. LEVEL SUS LEVEL CUTOFF FREQUENCY TIME INIT LEVEL (Initial Level): Sets the initial pitch level when a key is played. ATK TIME DCY TIME Key On REL TIME ATK TIME (Attack Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its Attack Level after a note is played. Key Off ATK LEVEL (Attack Level): Sets the initially targeted level after a note is played. Settings: ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63 DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63 SUS LEVEL (Sustain Level): -64 ~ +63 REL TIME (Release Time): -63 ~ +63 DCY TIME (Decay Time): Determines the time required for a sound to reach its basic pitch from Attack Level while the key is held. REL TIME (Release Time): Determines the time it takes for the basic pitch to reach the Release Level after the key has been released. REL LEVEL (Release Level): Sets the last targeted level after the key is released. 32 LEVEL Bank Conversion Table for Voices Used in Performances ATK LEVEL Basic Pitch PITCH TIME INIT LEVEL REL LEVEL ATK TIME DCY TIME REL TIME Key On Key Off Settings: INIT LEVEL (Initial Level): -64 ~ +63 ATK TIME (Attack Time): -63 ~ +63 ATK LEVEL (Attack Level: -64 ~ +63 DCY TIME (Decay Time): -63 ~ +63 REL TIME (Release Time): -63 ~ +63 REL LEVEL (Release Level): -64 ~ +63 MSB 0 0 ↓ 0 64 63 63 ↓ LSB 0 1 ↓ 101 0 0 1 ↓ Bank 0 1 ↓ 101 102 103 104 ↓ LCD XG000 XG001 ↓ XG101 SFX PRE0 PRE1 ↓ 63 63 63 - 7 8 12 - 110 111 115 999 PRE7 PRE8 PRE12 off Remarks XG ↓ ↓ ↓ XG for Performance Only ↓ ↓ ↓ ↓ for Performance Only Each bank can be selected directly by inputting the corresponding Bank number using the numeric keypad. NOTE For more information about Banks and Programs (voices), see the Voice List in the "Data List" book. Layer Edit 4 (independently applied to each Layer) ■ PROGRAM The functions in this row provide parameters which include fundamental settings such as voice assignment, volume and panning settings for each Layer. The parameters can be set for each Layer in a Performance. This lets you select a voice, or program, from the Bank previously selected with the BANK parameter, explained above. LAYER BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND EFFECT CHO SEND VARI SEND FILTER CUTOFF REZ POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN Settings: 1~128 UTILITY ■ BANK NOTE Note that the Program numbers here are 1~128 and the MIDI Program Change numbers are 0~127. To match the MIDI Program Change number when switching programs using an external MIDI device, subtract a value of "1" from the Program number. This lets you select a Bank, each of which contains up to 128 normal voices. To select a voice, you must first select a Bank number, and then select a Program number in the PROGRAM parameter, explained below. NOTE For more information about Banks and Programs (voices), see the Voice List in the "Data List" book. ■ VOLUME This sets the volume of each Layer. It is possible to assign a different volume setting for each Layer. Settings: off, XG000, 001, 003, 006, 008, 012, 014, 016~020, 024, 025, 027, 028, 032~043, 045, 064~072, 096~101, SFX, PRE 0~12 (for Performance only) Settings: 0~127 33 ■ PAN NOTE The value of some Layers may forcibly be changed when using the Variation effect. This sets the panning (the left or right position in the stereo spectrum) of each Layer. Different pannings can be set for each Layer, thus providing for a richly textured stereo image (for stereo output). NOTE For more information, see page 47. ■ FILTER This sets the filter parameters for each Layer. There are two parameters, CUTOFF and REZ (Resonance). Cutoff Resonance Settings: Random, L63 (far left in the stereo image) to L01 to C00 (center in the stereo image) to R01 to R63 (far right in the stereo image) NOTE Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals within a specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below the specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the signals above it. NOTE When set to "Random", the pan position of each Layer will alternate between left and right each time a Performance is played. NOTE Some of the voices are preset and have a fixed panning of "left" in the lower register and "right" in the higher register. In such a case, you cannot modify the pan setting. NOTE Depending on the voice selected, changing certain parameters may not produce a noticeable effect. ■ EFFECT This sets the effect send (output) level of each Layer. There are three parameters: REV SEND (Reverb Send), CHO SEND (Chorus Send) and VARI SEND (Variation Send). Each effect send level set here will be output to the Reverb, Chorus, and Variation effect sections as previously selected (see page 23). CUTOFF: Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter, or the frequency point above which other frequencies are filtered out. Higher settings result in brighter tones and lower settings result in darker tones. VOLUME Reverb Send Chorus Send FREQUENCIES PASSED FREQUENCIES CUT FREQUENCY CUTOFF FREQUENCY Variation Send REZ (Resonance): Sets the amount of filter resonance or emphasis around the cutoff frequency. Higher settings produce a higher resonant peak, while lower settings produce a relatively flat response. VOLUME REV SEND (Reverb Send): Determines the send level of the Reverb effect. RESONANCE CHO SEND (Chorus Send): Determines the send level of the Chorus effect. FREQUENCY VARI SEND (Variation Send): Enables or disables the output of the Variation effect. CUTOFF FREQUENCY Settings: CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63 REZ (Resonance): -64 ~ +63 Settings: REV SEND (Reverb Send): 0~127 CHO SEND (Chorus Send): 0~127 VARI SEND (Variation Send): OFF, ON 34 ■ POLY/MONO ■ Tips About Performance Mode This determines whether the voice in each Layer is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to 32 notes at a time). • In Performance Mode, you can use a Performance (voice) and 12 Parts (Part 5~16) for Multi. Though the receive channels are set in the factory as shown in the illustration, you can change the receive channels using RCV CH (Receive Channel) in Utility Mode. Generally, Polyphonic mode is selected to generate multiple sounds at one time. There are cases, however, where it is more effective to select Monophonic mode, such as when using a bass sound, brass sound, or an analog synthesizer sound. Performance Layer 1 MIDI Receive Channels set at the factory Layer 2 Ch. 1 LAYER BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND EFFECT CHO SEND VARI SEND FILTER CUTOFF REZ POLY/ MONO Layer 3 DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY Layer 4 SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN Settings: POLY (Polyphonic), MONO (Monophonic) Multi Part 5 Ch. 5 Part 6 Ch. 6 Part 7 Ch. 7 Part 14 Ch. 14 Part 15 Ch. 15 Part 16 Ch. 16 NOTE You can play up to 32 notes at a time. However, the number of notes may be reduced or truncated if you use voices which consist of two elements and/or play a rather complicated song which uses too many notes. • If a channel is selected for both Performance and one of the Parts, the two will be played simultaneously, producing two sounds at one time. Check the settings for the receive channels when you play the Performance and get an unintentional sound besides the Performance. • In Performance Mode, you cannot modify the Multi settings on the panel except for the receive channel setting. Use an external MIDI device such as sequencer to modify the Multi settings. • You can play only one Performance at one time. It is not possible to use the Performances as Parts for the Multi or to configure the Layers using the Performances. 35 In Multi Play mode you can play up to 16 Parts using an external MIDI sequencer. This mode is mainly used when the CS1x is used as an XG-compatible tone generator or as a data input device in a computer music system. You can use any XG voice from the 480 normal voices and 11 drum voices. When playing back from or recording to an external sequencer, you can use the Multi Part Edit function to edit the volume and effect of each Part. External MIDI Sequencer Editing Procedures PART 1~16 1. Select a Part. Use the PART [-]/[+] button to select the Part you want to edit. MIDI Data (1~16ch) MULTI PART EDIT XG voices, volume, pan, effect and other settings. ARPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE PRESET Entering Multi Play Mode USER + PROGRAM Press the MULTI button. A [▲] mark will appear below the word "MULTI" in the LCD. Category 2. Select the parameter. Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to the parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter and display the settings. Voice Number GG O TEMPO TYPE P BEND RANGE DEMO PERFORMANCE UTILITY BANK PROGRAM O LEVEL CUTOFF REV TYPE CHO TYPE FC CUTOFF C VARI TYPE LIMIT LOW LIMIT HIGH LIMIT LOW VARI EF VEL LIMIT OFFSET HIGH DCY LEVEL REL TIME AMOD PMOD FMOD DCY LEVEL REL TIME INIT LEVEL ATK LEVEL VOLUME PAN REV SEND ATK TIME EFFECT CHO SEND TUNE NOTE DETUNE SFT AEG ATK DCY TIME TIME FEG ATK DCY TIME TIME MULTI STORE SUB DIVIDE MW FMOD PMOD FMOD NOTE VARI VARI DATA PARAM PORTA TIME SWITCH DEPTH NAME ASSIGN1 PARAM C ASSIGN2 DATA PARAM LFO WAVE SPEED PHASE INIT PEG VARI SEND DCY REL TIME TIME FILTER CUTOFF REZ LA REL LEVEL POLY/ MONO DEMO Program (Voice) Number Part Number PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM You can also select a voice from the XG000 (GM) Bank by pressing the PROGRAM [-]/[+] buttons. NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data Entry knob to change the value. NOTE When you enter Multi Play mode from Performance mode, the CS1x automatically resets the internal tone generator to XG ON (001 Grand Piano) status. NOTE To change the value for all Parts at one time, hold SHIFT and press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. When you press SHIFT in Multi Part Edit, a letter "A" (All) will appear in the LCD below the word "PART". ● Multi Part Edit You can edit each Part in realtime. You can assign a voice to each Part and set the volume, pan and effect. These settings are temporary and cannot be stored. Therefore, entering Performance mode will clear this data. 7 6 5 4 3 ASSIGN 3. Set the value. Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the value. Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes the value continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and the [DOWN] button decreases the value. Playing the keyboard will play the voice of the Part currently displayed in the LCD. The Category name for the selected voice will be shown next to the voice name. Part 1-16 MIDI ARPEGGIO HOLD SHIFT + PART/LAYER/ OCTAVE BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN EFFECT FILTER POLY/MONO PRESET USER + PROGRAM NOTE Other parameters will appear in the LCD when you press the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Continue setting the other parameters. 2 1 NOTE To exit from the Multi Part Edit, press the MULTI button again. The display will return to the Voice name screen. You can also exit Multi Play mode by pressing the PERFORMANCE button to enter Performance mode. 36 ● Description of Each Function NOTE It is also possible to change the Program number quickly by using the Quick Program Change function, the same way as in Performance mode. For details, see page 21. ■ BANK This lets you select a Bank. Various normal voice banks containing up to 128 normal voices, a bank with different drum voices (kits), plus SFX banks are available to choose from. To select a voice, you must first select a Bank number, and then select a Program number in the PROGRAM parameter, explained below. Normal Voices and Drum Voices The available voices are divided into two groups: normal voices and drum voices. In Multi Play mode you can select and play both normal and drum voices. In general a "normal" voice is simply a pitched voice which can be played on a musical scale from low to high, such as a piano or trumpet. In Multi Play mode there are 480 XG normal voices. A "drum" voice is a complete set of drum and other percussion sounds, each sound having a fixed pitch. Each sound is assigned to a specific MIDI Note number which also corresponds to a key on a MIDI keyboard. In Multi Play mode there are 11 XG drum voices. For a list of the drum and percussion sound assignments to each key, see the XG Drum Voice List in the "Data List" book. Settings: off, XG000, 001, 003, 006, 008, 012, 014, 016~020, 024, 025, 027, 028, 032~043, 045, 064~072, 096~101, SFX, SFXKIT, DRUM TG300B Mode There are two tone generator modes: XG mode and TG300B mode. Normally the CS1x plays in XG mode. However, it automatically recognizes which mode to select based on incoming MIDI data, i.e., through MIDI System Exclusive messages that you can program using an external MIDI sequencer. Bank Conversion Table for Multi MSB 0 0 ↓ LSB 0 1 ↓ Bank 0 1 ↓ LCD XG000 XG001 ↓ 0 64 126 127 - 101 0 0 0 - 101 102 126 127 999 XG101 SFX SFXKIT DRUM Off In TG300B mode the CS1x will play multitimbral music data created for TG300B-compatible tone generators. TG300B mode also provides compatibility with the GM System Level1 format. In TG300B mode the CS1x can: • Play up to 16 Parts. • Choose from 579 Normal Voices and 10 Drum Voices. Each bank can be selected directly by inputting the corresponding number with the numeric keypad. ■ VOLUME This sets the volume of each Part. Different volume levels can be set for each Part. NOTE For more information about Banks and Programs (voices), see the XG Voice List in the "Data List" book. ■ PROGRAM This lets you select a voice, or program, from the Bank previously selected with the BANK parameter, explained above. Settings: 0~127 Settings: 1~128 NOTE Note that the Program numbers here are 1~128 and the MIDI Program Change numbers are 0~127. When switching programs using an external MIDI device, subtract a value of "1" from the Program number to match the MIDI Program Change number. NOTE For more information about Banks and Programs (voices), see the XG Voice List in the "Data List" book. 37 ■ PAN REV SEND (Reverb Send): Determines the send level of the Reverb effect. This sets the panning (the left or right position in the stereo spectrum) for each Part. Different pannings can be set for each Part (for stereo output). CHO SEND (Chorus Send): Determines the send level of the Chorus effect. VARI SEND (Variation Send): Enables or disables the output of the Variation effect. Settings: REV SEND (Reverb Send): 0~127 CHO SEND (Chorus Send): 0~127 VARI SEND (Variation Send): OFF, ON (or 0~127) Settings: Random, L63 (far left in the stereo image) to L01 to C00 (center of a stereo image) to R01 to R63 (far right in the stereo image) NOTE The Variation send parameters are OFF or ON when the Variation effect is used as the Insertion effect. They are 0~127 when used as the System effect. Normally, the Variation effect works as an Insertion Effect when not receiving parameter change messages to switch to System Effect from an external MIDI sequencer. For more information about Insertion and System effects, see page 47. NOTE When set to "Random", the panning of each Part will alternate between left and right each time a voice is played. NOTE Some of the voices are preset and fixed to a panning of "left" in the lower register and "right" in the higher register. In such a case, you cannot modify the pan setting. ■ FILTER This sets the parameters of the filter for each Part. There are two parameters, CUTOFF and REZ (resonance). ■ EFFECT This sets the effect send (output) level for each Part. There are three parameters: REV SEND (Reverb Send), CHO SEND (Chorus Send) and VARI SEND (Variation Send). You can change the effect send level for each effect in realtime when you are playing back XG song data containing effect settings using an external MIDI device. Cutoff 4 DEF 1 ABC 0 NOTE When you enter Multi Play mode (reset to XG ON) by pressing the MULTI button, each effect will be reset to the default settings: Hall 1 (Reverb), Chorus 1 (Chorus) and Delay L,C,R (Variation). In this case, the Reverb send level is set to 64, and the Chorus and Variation send levels are set to 0. Generally, filters change the timbre by passing signals within a specific frequency bandwidth and cutting others. The CS1x features an LPF (Low Pass Filter) which passes the signals below the specified frequency point (cutoff frequency) and cuts the signals above it. Depending on the XG song data being played, the effect types and their parameters used in the song may differ. NOTE Depending on the voice selected, changing certain parameters may not produce a noticeable effect. Note that the effect types and their parameters in the Performance Edit mode have no relation to the effect settings here. Reverb Send Resonance CUTOFF: Determines the cutoff frequency of the filter, or the frequency point above which other frequencies are filtered out. Higher settings result in brighter sounds and lower settings result in darker sounds. Chorus Send REZ (Resonance): Sets the amount of filter resonance or emphasis around the cutoff frequency. Higher settings produce a higher resonant peak, while lower settings produce a relatively flat response. Variation Send Settings: CUTOFF: -64 ~ +63 REZ (Resonance): -64 ~ +63 38 ■ POLY/MONO This determines whether the voice in each Layer is played monophonically (only one note at a time) or polyphonically (up to 32 notes at a time). Generally, Polyphonic mode is selected to generate multiple sounds at one time. There are cases, however,where it is more effective to select Monophonic mode, such as when using a bass sound, brass sound, or an analog synthesizer sound. BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND EFFECT CHO SEND VARI SEND FILTER CUTOFF REZ POLY/ MONO DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY SYSTEM MIDI ASSIGN U Settings: POLY (Polyphonic), MONO (Monophonic) NOTE You can play up to 32 notes at a time. However, the number of notes may be reduced or truncated if you use voices which consist of two elements and/or play a rather complicated song which uses too many notes. ■ Using the Multi Play Mode • Multi Play Mode is specifically aimed at playing CS1x as a tone generator using the external device such as sequencer. Consequently, the changes made in Multi Play Mode are temporary and cannot be stored. • The Arpeggiator function is not available in Multi Play Mode. It can only be applied to the Performances in Performance Mode. 39 In Utility mode you can set the CS1x system and MIDI parameters. CS1x NOTE Other parameters will appear in the LCD when you press the other Parameter Value UP/DOWN buttons. Continue setting the other parameters. CS1x MIDI SYSTEM SETTINGS MIDI SETTINGS MASTER TUNE KBD TRANS VEL CURVE VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH DEVICE NO LOCAL BULK DUMP ASSIGN CONTROL CHANGER NUMBER NOTE Press the PERFORMANCE button or the MULTI button to exit Utility mode and return to each respective mode. NOTE It is not necessary to store changes made in the Utility mode. The CS1x will remember any changes you make in this mode. Entering Utility Mode ● Description of Each Function Press the UTILITY button. A [▲] mark appears in the LCD below the word "UTILITY". SYSTEM This sets the tuning and other keyboard settings for the CS1x tone generator. There are four parameters: MASTER TUNE, KBD TRANS (Keyboard Transpose), VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) and VEL FIX (Velocity Fix). Parameter Name DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY ■ MASTER TUNE This tunes the CS1x's tone generator. Basic pitch is 440 Hz at note A3. Master tuning can be adjusted 1 Hz at a time. NOTE The LCD will display the parameter settings previously selected in Utility mode. The first time you press the UTILITY button after turning the power on, the LCD will display the first page (Master Tune) in Utility mode. ● Procedure 1. Select the parameter. Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button corresponding to the parameter you want to edit once to select the parameter and display the settings in the LCD. TIME TIME LEVEL TIME LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND TIME EFFECT CHO SEND Settings: -102 Hz to 0 (A3=440 Hz) to +102 Hz LEVEL ■ KBD TRANS (Keyboard Transpose) VARI SEND This lets you transpose the pitch in semitones. The transpose value will also be reflected in the Octave Shift function on the panel. DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM KBD VEL CURVE TRANS VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH MIDI DEVICE NO 2. Set the value. Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button again to set the value. Holding the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button changes the value continuously. The [UP] button increases the value and the [DOWN] button decreases the value. TIME TIME LEVEL TIME LEVEL BANK PROGRAM VOLUME PAN REV SEND TIME EFFECT CHO SEND Settings: -36 to 0 (standard) to +36 LEVEL VARI SEND DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI STORE UTILITY MASTER TUNE SYSTEM KBD VEL CURVE TRANS VEL FIX TRANS CH RCV CH NOTE This function setting is related to OCTAVE SHIFT on the panel, the indication may be changed after using the OCTAVE SHIFT function. MIDI DEVICE NO NOTE You can also use the numeric keypad (0~9) or the Data Entry knob to change the value. 40 ■ VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) Hard: This curve is designed to increase the volume level with a stronger playing style. This is suitable for people with a strong key touch. The velocity curve set here determines the way the CS1x's tone generator responds to playing velocity when the VEL FIX parameter (see below) is set to OFF. The following six types of curves are available: VOLUME Norm (Normal): The velocity is in proportion to the strength (how hard you play the keyboard). VOLUME KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH Settings: Norm, Soft1, Soft2, Easy, Wide, Hard KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH ■ VEL FIX (Velocity Fix) Soft1: This curve is designed to increase the volume level with a softer playing style. This is suitable for people with a soft key touch. This sets the velocity of the CS1x keyboard to a specific value. This is used when you want to play the sound at a fixed velocity regardless of keyboard touch. VOLUME KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH Soft2: This curve is also designed to increase the volume level with a softer playing style. This is close to Normal compared with Soft1. Settings: 1 ~ 127, off VOLUME NOTE Set the parameter in VEL FIX to OFF to enable the velocity curve previously selected in the VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) parameter. MIDI The MIDI parameters let you exchange MIDI data between the CS1x and an external MIDI device. There are five parameters: TRANS CH (Transmit Channel), RCV (Receive Channel), DEVICE NO (Device Number), LOCAL (Local On/Off) and BULK DUMP (Performance Bulk Dump). KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH Easy: In general, this curve is also designed to increase the volume level with a softer playing style. However, the volume level is stable in all registers since the velocity curve in the mid range is close to Normal. ■ TRANS CH (Transmit Channel) VOLUME This sets the MIDI transmit channel from the CS1x to an external MIDI device such as a sequencer. KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH Wide: This curve is designed to lower the volume level with a softer playing style and increase the volume level with a stronger playing style. As a result, you feel a wider dynamic range. Settings: 1~16ch (channel) VOLUME NOTE You can use the CS1x to play and control an external MIDI device. For details, see page 9. KEYBOARD PLAYING STRENGTH 41 ■ RCV CH (Receive Channel) ■ BULK DUMP (Performance Bulk Dump) In Performance Mode, this sets the MIDI receive channel for controlling the CS1x with an external device such as a MIDI sequencer or computer. This lets you send Performance data from the CS1x in bulk to another CS1x or to the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2. This is convenient for backing up, storing, or managing your important Performance data. In Multi Play mode, the CS1x resets the internal tone generator to XG ON (001 Grand Piano) status and automatically receives the external data. NOTE To enable transmission, first connect the MIDI devices. (For details about setting up each device, see the respective owner's manuals of the external MIDI devices.) It is necessary to match the device number of the CS1x with the device number of the external MIDI device. (See the DEVICE NO parameter, above.) Bulk Dump Send 1.Select the type of data you want to send by pressing the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button. You can select from the following types: Settings: LAYER A (Layer All for a Performance) = 1~16ch, Part 5~16 = 1~16, off NOTE In Performance Mode, the receive channels can be used for a Performance and 12 Parts (Part 5~16) for Multi. However, you cannot use the Insertion effect for Parts 5~16. ■ DEVICE NO (Device Number) This sets the MIDI device number. When transmitting or receiving system exclusive messages such as bulk dump or parameter change messages with an external MIDI device, you must match the device numbers for both the CS1x and the external device. 1Perf: The Preset or User Performance data currently selected in Performance mode. all: All of the User Performance data and the System data. 2.Press the ENTER/YES button to execute the bulk dump operation. "End" will appear in the LCD when the operation is completed, and the LCD will return to the original display. Settings: 1~16, all, off *& VWX YZ' 7 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 ABC 3 SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC YES ■ LOCAL (Local On/Off) Bulk Dump Receive This lets you retrieve CS1x Performance data from an external device, loading it back into the CS1x in bulk. This determines whether the keyboard is connected to the CS1x's internal tone generator. When Local is set to OFF, the keyboard is disconnected from the tone generator. The internal tone generator will not respond to the keyboard (no sound will be produced), but it will respond to incoming MIDI data from an external device. However, the keyboard still transmits MIDI messages from the MIDI OUT jack. The data that can be received will differ depending on the mode. For details about the MIDI data format, see the "Data List" book. It is necessary to match the device number of the CS1x with the device number of the external MIDI device. (See the DEVICE NO parameter, above.) For normal play, local should be set to ON. EXTERNAL MIDI DEVICE MIDI OUT MIDI IN TONE GENERATOR MIDI IN MIDI OUT KEYBOARD LOCAL OFF Settings: on, off 42 ■ ASSIGN CTRL NO (Assign Control Change Number) Assigning the Controllers 1.Move the controller on the panel to which the Control Change Number is to be assigned. The parameters of the controller will appear in the LCD. This lets you assign Control Change Numbers to controllers such as the Modulation Wheel or Sound Control Knobs. This is mainly used to control external devices connected via MIDI. NOTE The main function of the Sound Control Knobs will not be changed. You can designate whether the Modulation Wheel or the Foot Controller is used for Scene Control (page 16). Control Change Number Name Controller Following are the Control Change Numbers and Names that can be assigned to the various controllers: Controller Modulation Wheel Sound Control Knob 1 (ATTACK) Sound Control Knob 2 (RELEASE) Sound Control Knob 3 (ASSIGN 1/DATA) Sound Control Knob 4 (CUTOFF) Sound Control Knob 5 (RESONANCE) Sound Control Knob 6 (ASSIGN 2) Footswitch connected to the FOOTSWITCH jack on the rear panel Foot Controller connected to the FOOT CONTROLLER jack on the rear panel Foot Volume pedal connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack on the rear panel LCD MW Knob1 Knob2 Knob3 Knob4 Knob5 Knob6 FS FC FV NOTE Press the SCENE1 or SCENE 2 button to display the Scene Control parameters. 2.Press the Parameter Value UP/DOWN button to select the Control Change Number and Name. 3.Repeat steps 1 and 2 to assign the Control Change Numbers and Names to each controller. NOTE In the Scene Control settings, you can choose from Mod. Wheel (Modulation Wheel) or FootCtrl (Foot Controller). SCENE 1 or 2 buttons (only for the Scene Control) NOTE This function is convenient for controlling an external MIDI device with the CS1x. For details, see page 53. Scene ■ Tips About the Sound Control Knobs The changes made by the Sound Control Knobs can be output as the MIDI messages. The MIDI messages output via MIDI OUT can be assigned using the ASSIGN CTRL NO function shown at the left. Assignable Control Change Numbers and Names Control Change Number 1 5 6 7 10 11 16 17 18 19 38 64 65 66 67 71 72 73 74 84 91 93 94 Others Name Modulation Wheel Portament Time Data Entry MSB Main Volume Panpot Expression General purpose1 General purpose2 General purpose3 General purpose4 Data Entry LSB Hold 1(Damper/Sustain) Portament Switch Sostenute Soft Pedal Harmonic Contents Release Time Attack Time Brightness Portament Control Reverb Depth Chorus Depth Variation Depth ------- LCD Mod.Whl PortaTm DataMSB MainVol Panpot Expres. Generl1 Generl2 Generl3 Generl4 DataLSB Hold1 PortaSW Sostnut Soft Harmonic RelTime AtkTime Bright. PortaCt Reverb Chorus Vari ------- The assignments set at the factory: Sound Control Knob 1 Sound Control Knob 2 Sound Control Knob 3 Sound Control Knob 4 Sound Control Knob 5 Sound Control Knob 6 73: Attack Time 72: Release Time 17: General purpose2 74: Brightness 71: Harmonic Contents 18: General purpose3 • When the CS1x receives the data assigned to each Knob from an external MIDI device, the parameter printed on the panel for the Knob will be affected. For example, the Attack Time will be affected, when the Brightness (74) is assigned to the Knob 1 and the Attack Time (73) is assigned to the Knob 3, and then the message for the Brightness (74) are transmitted from an external device. • Both data assigned to the Knob using the ASSIGN CTRL NO function and Knob data which parameter name is printed on the panel are sent to the internal tone generator when turning the Knob. For example, both Brightness (74) and Attack Time will be affected when the Brightness (74) is assigned to the Knob 1 and the Knob 1 is turned. NOTE General Purpose: With the CS1x, General Purpose 1 is for FC, 2 for knob 3 (ASSIGN1), 3 for knob 6 (ASSIGN2) and 4 for no setting. 43 In Store mode you can store edited Performances or Scenes in the CS1x's internal memory. To enter Store Mode, you must first be in Performance Mode. 3. Press the ENTER/YES button. “Sure?” will appear in the LCD. NOTE You cannot enter Store mode from Multi Play mode or Utility mode. PERFORMANCE STORE Preset Performance 1~128 SCENE STORE User Performance 1~128 6 Knob Position STORE Scene 1/2 Scene 1 Memory *& VWX YZ' 7 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 3 ABC SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC Edited Performance Store Destination YES To audition the sound, simply play the keyboard. Storing a Performance 4. Press the YES/ENTER button again to execute the storing operation. The display will return to the Performance Play mode screen after the data is stored. 1. After editing a performance, press the STORE button to enter Store mode. Press the NO button to cancel the storing operation. NOTE DEMO ERFORMANCE STORE Pressing the PERFORMANCE button exits Store mode. MULTI UTILITY 2. Select the User Performance number in which you want to store the Performance, using the numeric keypad (0~9), PROGRAM [-]/[+] buttons, or Data Entry knob. When storing a Performace, the position of each Sound Control Knob will also be stored. Therefore, when selecting the stored User Performance in Performance Play mode, the CS1x will produce the sound affected by each Sound Control Knob position at that time. (Turning the Knob will restore the sound with the current Sound Control Knob positions.) Storing a Scene If you write over an existing User Performance, the data previously stored there will be lost. To be safe, always store your important data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2. If you want, you can reset the User Performances back to the original factory settings. For details, see Factory Settings, page 46. There are two "Scene" memories dedicated to each Performance. This function is used to assign a Scene, or the position of the six Sound Control Knobs, to the SCENE 1 or SCENE 2 button. This is convenient for live performances or recording sessions, since it lets you access a particular setting simply by pressing a button. NOTE To rename the Performance, select the Performance Name parameter in Performance Edit mode (see page 24). NOTE Two Scenes can be stored in each Performance. Once you have stored a Scene to the edit buffer (temporary save), to store the Scene data permanently you must perform the Performance store operation, above. (Before executing the Performance Store operation to record the Scene as a part of the performance, turn all the sound control knobs to their center positions.) Otherwise, you will lose the Scene settings if you select another Performance or enter Multi Play mode. 44 Selecting a Scene First select the Performance to which you have stored a Scene. Then press the SCENE 1 or SCENE 2 button to select the Scene. The LED by the button will light to indicate that you have activated the Scene settings. 1. Set each Sound Control Knob to your preference. AMP EG ATTACK RELEASE ASSIGN 1/DATA CUTOFF RESONANCE ASSIGN 2 Each Sound Control Knob will be disabled when a Scene is selected, and you will not be able to change the parameters using the knobs. You can use the Modulation Wheel or Foot Controller to change the parameters (Scene settings) continuously between the SCENE 1 and SCENE 2 settings in realtime. The minimum position of the controller is Scene1, and the maximum postion is Scene 2. For details about which controller is used to change between two Scenes, see page 43. FILTER 2. Hold STORE and press the SCENE 1 button to store the current Sound Control Knob settings to the SCENE 1 button memory. To store another set of Sound Control Knob settings, hold STORE and press the SCENE 2 button. 2 MW/FC SCENE 2 1 SCENE 1 SCENE 2 MW/FC DEMO PERFORMANCE MULTI 1 STORE UTILITY SCENE MODULATION The following message will appear in the LCD when the Scene is stored to the edit buffer. Changes continuously between SCENE 1 and SCENE 2 Example: Settings stored to the SCENE 1 button. 3. Store the Scene to the currently selected Performance using the Performance store operation. 45 You can reset all of the settings in the CS1x (Performance, Scene, System and MIDI settings) to the original factory (initial) settings. NOTE Executing this function will replace all of your existing data. As such, always store your important data to an external device such as the Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2 beforehand. Turn the power of the CS1x off, then, while holding the 7, 8, and 9 keys on the numeric keypad, turn the power back on. *& VWX YZ' 7 8 9 MNO PQR STU 4 5 6 DEF GHI JKL 1 2 ABC ON OFF 3 SPACE 0 ENTER NO/ QUICK PC YES 46 The CS1x features three independent digital effects units, Reverb, Chorus and Variation, which can be applied to the voices in a variety of ways to provide a wide range of sound processing capabilities. In Performance mode you can choose the Reverb, Chorus and Variation effect types, as well as set additional parameters for the Variation effect. In Multi Play mode, system exclusive (MIDI) data programmed in a song sequence (of an external sequencer or computer) can change the various CS1x effect parameters at specific points in the song to greatly enhance the sound and impact of the playback. ■ Type 1: Reverb 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL SYSTEM EFFECT Reverb recreates the sounds of various environments by adding room ambiance through delays or reflections. There are 11 Reverb types to choose from. (See page 49.) 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 Reverb Effect LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL Chorus Effect ■ Type 2: Chorus 0 10 LEVEL Chorus creates a variety of rich, spacious-sounding effects which are especially dramatic in stereo. There are 11 Chorus effect types, including Chorus and Flanger. (See page 49.) 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL 0 10 LEVEL ■ Type 3: Variation Insertion Effect Variation is a special section of various effects including Reverb and Chorus, plus many others not found in the other sections, such as Distortion, Wah, and Auto Pan. There are 43 Variation effect types. (See page 49.) Insertion Effect Variation Effect 1 2 14 15 16 Multi Play Mode Part 1-16 System and Insertion Effects The CS1x effects sections can be designated as either System or Insertion effects. Reverb and Chorus are always System effects, which means they can be applied to any or all Parts. The Variation effect can also be a System effect, or it can be designated as an Insertion effect, which means it can be dedicated to a specific Part. L1 L2 L3 L4 Performance Mode Layer 1-4 Can be used as either System or Insertion effect. Performance Mode The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the CS1x is in Performance mode. In this case the Variation effect is fixed as the Insertion effect. Basically, CS1x System and Insertion effects work the same way as in a sound mixer, as shown in the diagram at right. For example, System effects can be applied to musical instruments (i.e., Parts) which are connected to the various mixer channels; the amount of each System effect is determined by channel "send" and system "return" level controls. An Insertion effect can be connected ("inserted") into the signal flow of a specific channel in order to process the sound of that instrument (i.e., Layer/Part) only. The Variation Send On/Off switch ! determines which Layers the Variation effect is applied to. The Performance Layer Edit 4 menu EFFECT VARI SEND parameter turns the Variation effect ON/OFF for each Layer (see page 34). The Variation effect wet/dry balance " determines the ratio of effected (wet) signal to original (dry) signal. The resulting Variation effect signal is then sent to the Reverb effect via the Reverb send control #, and to the Chorus effect via the Chorus send control $; the Send Chorus To Reverb With the CS1x, in Performance mode the Insertion effect (Variation) can be applied to one or more of the four Layers, while in Multi Play mode it can only be applied to a single Part. signal % can be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 knob. The Performance Layer Edit 4 menu EFFECT REV SEND & and CHO SEND ' parameters determine the respective Reverb and Chorus send levels applied to each Layer (see The System and Insertion effect configurations can be controlled in detail by XG song data (signified by the XG mark) when the CS1x is in Multi Play mode. page 34). Layers which are switched off !, as well as Parts 5~16, can still have System Reverb and Chorus effects applied to them. 47 MULTI PERFORMANCE •XG effect set to Insertion •Part 3 VARI SEND set to ON Layer 1 ! on # Rev Send $ Part 1 (for each layer/part) Rev Return Level Rev Rev Layer 2 ! on Vari " & wet/dry Rev Send Knobl (Cho to Rev) Part 2 % Send Cho to Rev Out & Out ! Vari wet/dry ' Layer 3 ! on Part 3 Cho Send Cho Cho Cho Send $ Cho Return Level % (for each layer/part) off Layer 4 ! Part 16 Part 5 Rev Send Cho Send " # The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the CS1x is in Multi Play mode and the Variation effect is designated as a System effect. Part 16 NOTE Reverb and Chorus send levels for Layers with the Variation Send On/Off switch set to ON are determined by the highest numbered Layer. For example, if Layers 1, 2 and 3 are switched on, then the Reverb and Chorus send level for Layer 3 will determine the amount of effect applied to each Layer. Each of the 16 Parts has a Dry send ! level which controls the amount of original signal for each Part (page 38). Reverb send ", Chorus send #, and Variation send $ levels control the amount of effect applied to each Part, determined by the Multi Edit EFFECT REV SEND, CHO SEND and VARI SEND parameters (between 0~127), respectively (page 38). Reverb return %, Chorus return & and Variation return ' levels can also be controlled to determine the amount of each effect applied (page 38). NOTE In Performance mode effect send levels for Parts 5~16 (as well as Layers 1~4) can be controlled by an external MIDI sequencer. The Variation effect cannot be applied to Parts 5~16. The Send Chorus to Reverb ( level is sent from the Chorus effect to the Reverb effect (page 38). The Send Variation to Reverb ) and Send Multi Play Mode Variation to Chorus * levels are sent from the Variation effect to the Reverb and Chorus effects, respectively (page 38). These three parameters let you make series and parallel effect configurations which provide enormous sound enhancement flexibility. The diagram below shows the signal flow of the three effects when the CS1x is in Multi Play mode and the Variation effect is designated as an Insertion effect. NOTE In Multi Play mode the various effect settings can be controlled by MIDI system exclusive Parameter Change messages (received from an external sequencer or computer). The illustrations at right show the Reverb, Chorus and Variation send parameters which can be controlled from the CS1x panel. For details about the others, refer to each page number as listed in the following explanation. •XG effect set to System % Rev Return Level Rev ! Cho to Rev Dry Send Part 1 ( & ) Cho Return Cho Part 2 Vari to Rev Vari to Cho * ' Vari Return NOTE Vari When the CS1x is in Multi Play mode, the Variation Effect is automatically reset as an Insertion Effect. If you want to set the Variation Effect as a System Effect, you need to send a parameter change message to the CS1x from an external MIDI sequencer. Part 16 Rev Send Cho Send Vari Send " # $ Vari Send, Cho Send, Rev Send = 0~127 The Variation (Insertion) effect can be applied to any one of the 16 Parts at a time, designated by switching the Multi Edit EFFECT VARI SEND parameter to ON (page 38). The ratio of Variation effect (wet) signal to Out NOTE If you select Effect Off in the Variation Type menu, the Layers which have the VARI SEND function set to ON will not sound. When you don't want to use the Variation Effect on the Layers, set the VARI TYPE to Thru. original (dry) signal is determined by the wet/dry balance !, which in turn controls the amount of Variation effect signal applied to the Part (page 38). Although only one Part at a time can have the Variation effect applied to it, all Parts, including the Part with Variation effect, can have Reverb and Chorus applied, determined by the Reverb send " and Chorus send # level settings (between 0~127) of the Multi Edit EFFECT REV SEND and CHO SEND parameters, respectively (page 38). Reverb return $ and Chorus return % levels can also be controlled to determine the amount of each effect applied. The Send Chorus to Reverb & level from the Chorus effect to the Reverb effect can also be controlled in a series, if you assign it to the ASSIGN 1 knob (page 26); in this case, the Chorus return % level should be set to "0". 48 Effect Type List WHITE ROOM ,TUNNEL, BASEMENT No. Parameter Reverb Types Following are descriptions of the Reverb types. No. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Exclusive MSB LSB 0 0 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 1 2 2 3 0 3 1 4 0 10 0 11 0 13 0 Effect Type Description NO EFFECT HALL1 HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE WHITE ROOM TUNNEL BASEMENT Effect turned off. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb appropriate for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit. A unique short reverb with a bit of initial delay. Simulation of a tunnel space expanding to left and right. A bit of initial delay followed by reverb with a unique resonance. Exclusive MSB LSB 0 0 41 0 41 1 41 2 41 8 42 0 42 1 42 2 42 8 43 0 43 1 42 8 Effect Type NO EFFECT CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 Description Effect turned off. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Conventional chorus program that adds natural spaciousness. Chorus with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will also apply to the effect sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. CELESTE with stereo input. The pan setting specified for the Part will apply to the effect sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. When the effect type is set to Effect OFF while the Insertion effect is used, no sound is output. If you don't want to use the Variation effect, select Thru to pass the signal through the Variation effect without applying any effect. NO EFFECT HALL1 HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 ROOM3 STAGE1 STAGE2 PLATE DELAY L,C,R DELAY L,R ECHO CROSS DELAY ER1 ER2 GATE REVERB REVERSE GATE KARAOKE 1 KARAOKE 2 KARAOKE 3 CHORUS1 CHORUS2 CHORUS3 CHORUS4 CELESTE1 CELESTE2 CELESTE3 CELESTE4 FLANGER1 FLANGER2 FLANGER3 SYMPHONIC ROTARY SPEAKER 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 46 47 48 48 49 4A 4B 4C 4D 4E 40 TREMOLO AUTO PAN PHASER1 PHASER2 DISTORTION OVER DRIVE AMP SIMULATOR 3BAND EQ (MONO) 2BAND EQ (STEREO) AUTO WAH (LFO) THRU Effect Type 0 0 0 8 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 3 4 Initial Delay HPF Cutoff 0~63 Thru~8.0kHz 0-63 0-52 table#5 table#3 5 6 7 LPF Cutoff Width Heigt 1.0k~Thru 0.5~10.2m 0.5~20.2m 34-60 0-37 0-73 table#3 table#8 table#8 8 9 Depth Wall Vary 0.5~30.2m 0~30 0-104 0-30 table#8 10 11 12 Dry/Wet Rev Delay Density D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~63 0~3 1-127 0-63 0-3 13 14 Er/ Rev Balance E63> R~ E=R ~ E<R63 1-127 15 16 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 Display Value 0.1~715.0ms 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 3 4 Cch Delay Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 5 6 7 Feedback Level Cch Level High Damp -63~+63 0~127 0.1~1.0 1-127 0-127 1-10 10 11 12 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 13 14 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 table#3 15 16 EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 28-58 52-76 table#3 See Table 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Description 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Display Value 0.1~715.0ms 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 Feedback Delay 1 Feedback Delay 2 Feedback Level High Damp 0.1~715.0ms 0.1~715.0ms -63~+63 0.1~1.0 1-7150 1-7150 1-127 1-10 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 See Table Control ● table#3 Display Value Lch Delay1 Lch Feedback Level Rch Delay1 Rch Feedback Level High Damp Lch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms -63~+63 0.1~355.0ms -63~+63 0.1~1.0 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-127 1-3550 1-127 1-10 1-3550 Rch Delay2 Delay2 Level 0.1~355.0ms 0~127 1-3550 0-127 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 12 13 14 15 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz 8-40 52-76 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 Control ● 11 table#3 table#3 CROSS DELAY No. Parameter *LSB = 0 is the basic effect type. Display Value 1 L->R Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 2 3 4 5 R->L Delay Feedback Level Input Select High Damp 0.1~355.0ms -63~+63 L,R,L&R 0.1~1.0 1-3550 1-127 0-2 1-10 See Table Control 6 7 8 9 10 Display Value See Table Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 1 2 Reverb Time Diffusion 0.3~30.0s 0~10 0-69 0-10 table#4 11 3 4 Initial Delay HPF Cutoff 0.1~99.3ms Thru~8.0kHz 0-63 0-52 table#5 table#3 12 13 14 15 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz 8-40 52-76 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 1.0kHz~Thru Control ● Lch Delay Rch Delay No. Parameter HALL1,HALL2, ROOM1,ROOM2,ROOM3 ,STAGE1,STAGE2 ,PLATE LPF Cutoff See Table ECHO Effect Parameter List 5 6 7 ● Lch Delay Rch Delay 1 2 Effect turned off. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a hall. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb simulating the resonance of a room. Reverb approproate for a solo instrument. Reverb approproate for a solo instrument. Reverb simulating a metal plate reverb unit. A program that creates three delay sounds; L, R, and C (center). A program that creates two delay sounds; L and R. Two feedback delays are provided. Two delays (L and R) and independent feedback delays for L and R. A program that crosses the feedback of two delays. An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb. An effect that produces only the early reflection component of reverb. A simulation of gated reverb. A program that simulates gated reverb played backwords. A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb. A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb. A delay with feedback of the same type as used for karaoke reverb. A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness. A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness. A conventional chorus program, providing natural spaciousness. Chorus with stereo input. A 3-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 4-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. A 5-phase LFO adds modulation and spaciousness to the sound. Chorus with stereo input. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. Adds a jet-airplane effect to the sound. A multi-phase version of CELESTE. A simulation of a rotary speaker. You can use an AC1 (assignable controller) etc. to controll the speed of rotation. An effect that cyclically modulates the volume. A program that cyclically moves the sound image to left and right, front and back. Cyclically changes the phase to add modulation to the sound. Phaser with stereo input. Adds a sharp-edged distortion to the sound. Adds mild distortion ti the sound. A simulation of a guitar amp. A mono EQ with adjustable LOW, MID, and HIGH equalizing. A stereo EQ with adjustable LOW and HIGH. Ideal for drum Parts. Cyclically modulates the center frequency of a wah filter. With an AC1 etc. this can function as a pedal wah. Bypass without applying an effect. *MSB, LSB is represented in hexadecimal. No. Parameter Control table#5 1 2 No. Parameter Following are descriptions of the Variation types. Exclusive MSB LSB 0 0 1 0 1 1 2 0 2 1 2 2 3 0 3 1 4 0 5 0 6 0 7 0 8 0 9 0 9 1 A 0 B 0 14 0 14 1 14 2 41 0 41 1 41 2 41 8 42 0 42 1 42 2 42 8 43 0 43 1 43 8 44 0 45 0 table#4 DELAY L,R NOTE 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 0-69 0-10 8 9 Variation Types No. See Table 0.3~30.0s 0~10 No. Parameter Following are descriptions of the Chorus types. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Value Reverb Time Diffusion DELAY L,C,R Chorus Types No. Display 1 2 34-60 Control table#3 Dry/Wet Rev Delay Density D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~63 0~3 1-127 0-63 0-3 13 14 Er/ Rev Balance E63> R~ E=R ~ E<R63 1-127 15 16 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 table#3 table#3 NOTE The parameter depth marked with a ● can be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly assigned. 8 9 10 11 12 ● ● table#5 The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data List" book. 49 EARLY REF1,EARLY REF2 No. Parameter SYMPHONIC Display Value See Table Display Value See Table S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0.1~7.0 0-5 0-44 1 2 LFO Frequency LFO Depth 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 0-127 0-127 table#1 table#6 3 4 0-127 table#2 table#5 1 2 Type Room Size 3 4 Diffusion Initial Delay 0~10 0.1~99.3ms 0-10 0-63 5 6 7 Feedback Level HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff -63~+63 Thru~8.0kHz 1.0k~Thru 1-127 0-52 34-60 Control No. Parameter 8 9 10 11 12 Dry/Wet Liveness Density D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~10 0~3 1-127 0-10 0-3 13 14 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 ● 8-40 52-76 table#3 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 28-58 52-76 table#3 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 ● ROTARY SPEAKER Display Value See Table table#6 1 2 table#5 3 4 1 2 Type Room Size TypeA,TypeB 0.1~7.0 0-1 0-44 3 4 Diffusion Initial Delay 0~10 0.1~99.3ms 0-10 0-63 5 6 7 Feedback Level HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff -63~+63 Thru~8.0kHz 1.0k~Thru 1-127 0-52 34-60 Control No. Parameter 8 9 10 11 12 Dry/Wet Liveness Density D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~10 0~3 1-127 0-10 0-3 13 14 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 ● Display Value See Table Control LFO Frequency LFO Depth 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 0-127 0-127 table#1 ● 5 6 7 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 table#3 8 9 EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 28-58 52-76 table#3 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 15 16 TREMOLO KARAOKE1,2,3 No. Parameter Display Value See Table Delay Time Feedback Level 0~400.0ms -63~+63 0-127 1-127 table#7 HPF Cutoff LPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 1.0k~Thru 0-52 34-60 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 No. Parameter Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 ● 1-127 No. Parameter Display Value See Table Control LFO Frequency AM Depth 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 0-127 0-127 table#1 ● PM Depth 0~127 0-127 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 4-124 0-1 resolution=3deg. LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg Input Mode mono/stereo table#3 AUTO PAN CHORUS1,2,3,4, CELESTE1,2,3,4 Display Value See Table 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 -63~+63 0.0~50.0ms 0-127 0-127 1-127 0-127 table#1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 LFO Frequency LFO PM Depth Feedback Level Delay Offset EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 table#3 8 9 EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 28-58 52-76 table#3 Dry/Wet D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 1-127 No. Parameter Control table#2 Display Value See Table Control 1 2 3 4 5 6 LFO Frequency L/R Depth F/R Depth PAN Direction 0.00~39.7Hz 0~127 0~127 L<->R,L->R,L<-R,Lturn,Rturn,L/R 0-127 0-127 0-127 0-5 table#1 ● EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 28-58 52-76 8 9 10 11 ● table#3 12 13 14 15 16 13 14 15 16 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain 15 16 No. Parameter 10 11 12 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain 8 9 13 14 GATE REVERB,REVERSE GATE 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 0.0~50.0ms 10 11 12 15 16 1 2 Delay Offset 5 6 7 Control Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 FLANGER1,FLANGER2,FLANGER3 No. Parameter PHASER1, PHASER2 Display Value See Table 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 3 4 5 LFO Depth Feedback Level Delay Offset 0~127 -63~+63 0.0~6.3ms 0-127 1-127 0-63 table#2 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3 7 8 9 10 EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 Control No. Parameter Display Value See Table 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 0~127 0~127 -63~+63 0-127 0-127 1-127 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Dry/Wet -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 52-76 28-58 52-76 1-127 11 Stage 6~10(phaser1) / 3~5(phaser2) 3-10 12 13 14 15 Diffusion Mono/Stereo LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg. 1 LFO Frequency 2 LFO Depth 3 Phase Shift Offset 4 Feedback Level 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 4-124 table#3 ● resolution=3deg. 16 0-1 4-124 Control table#3 table#3 ● Phaser2 16 NOTE The parameter depth marked with a ● can be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly assigned. The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data List" book. 50 Effect Data Assign Table DISTORTION,OVERDRIVE No. Parameter Display Value 1 2 Drive EQ Low Frequency 0~127 50Hz~2.0kHz 0-127 8-40 table#3 3 4 EQ Low Gain LPF Cutoff -12~+12dB 1.0k~Thru 52-76 34-60 table#3 5 6 7 Output Level 0~127 0-127 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 28-54 8 9 EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width -12~+12dB 1.0~12.0 52-76 10-120 Dry/Wet Edge(Clip Curve) D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~127 1-127 0-127 mild~sharp See Table 10 11 12 See Table Control ● Table#1 LFO Frequency Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 table#3 13 14 15 16 GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR No. Parameter Display Value 1 2 Drive AMP Type 0~127 Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-127 0-3 3 4 LPF Cutoff Output Level 1.0k~Thru 0~127 34-60 0-127 Dry/Wet Edge(Clip Curve) D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 0~127 1-127 0-127 Control ● table#3 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 mild~sharp 13 14 Value Data 0.00 32 0.04 33 0.08 34 0.13 35 0.17 36 0.21 37 0.25 38 0.29 39 0.34 40 0.38 41 0.42 42 0.46 43 0.51 44 0.55 45 0.59 46 0.63 47 0.67 48 0.72 49 0.76 50 0.80 51 0.84 52 0.88 53 0.93 54 0.97 55 1.01 56 1.05 57 1.09 58 1.14 59 1.18 60 1.22 61 1.26 62 1.30 63 Value Data Value Data 1.35 64 2.69 96 1.39 65 2.78 97 1.43 66 2.86 98 1.47 67 2.94 99 1.51 68 3.03 100 1.56 69 3.11 101 1.60 70 3.20 102 1.64 71 3.28 103 1.68 72 3.37 104 1.72 73 3.45 105 1.77 74 3.53 106 1.81 75 3.62 107 1.85 76 3.70 108 1.89 77 3.87 109 1.94 78 4.04 110 1.98 79 4.21 111 2.02 80 4.37 112 2.06 81 4.54 113 2.10 82 4.71 114 2.15 83 4.88 115 2.19 84 5.05 116 2.23 85 5.22 117 2.27 86 5.38 118 2.31 87 5.55 119 2.36 88 5.72 120 2.40 89 6.06 121 2.44 90 6.39 122 2.48 91 6.73 123 2.52 92 7.07 124 2.57 93 7.40 125 2.61 94 7.74 126 2.65 95 8.08 127 Value 8.41 8.75 9.08 9.42 9.76 10.10 10.80 11.40 12.10 12.80 13.50 14.10 14.80 15.50 16.20 16.80 17.50 18.20 19.50 20.90 22.20 23.60 24.90 26.20 27.60 28.90 30.30 31.60 33.00 34.30 37.00 39.70 Value Data 3.2 64 3.3 65 3.4 66 3.5 67 3.6 68 3.7 69 3.8 70 3.9 71 4.0 72 4.1 73 4.2 74 4.3 75 4.4 76 4.5 77 4.6 78 4.7 79 4.8 80 4.9 81 5.0 82 5.1 83 5.2 84 5.3 85 5.4 86 5.5 87 5.6 88 5.7 89 5.8 90 5.9 91 6.0 92 6.1 93 6.2 94 6.3 95 Value 9.6 9.7 9.8 9.9 10.0 11.1 12.2 13.3 14.4 15.5 17.1 18.6 20.2 21.8 23.3 24.9 26.5 28.0 29.6 31.2 32.8 34.3 35.9 37.5 39.0 40.6 42.2 43.7 45.3 46.9 48.4 50.0 15 16 Table#2 Modulation Delay Offset MONO EQ(3-BAND) No. Parameter Display Value See Table 1 2 EQ Low Gain EQ Mid Frequency -12~+12dB 500Hz~10.0kHz 52-76 28-54 table#3 3 4 EQ Mid Gain EQ Mid Width -12~+12dB 1.0~12.0 52-76 10-120 EQ High Gain EQ Low Frequency EQ High Frequency -12~+12dB 50Hz~2.0kHz 500Hz~16.0kHz 52-76 8-40 28-58 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Control table#3 table#3 STEREO EQ(2-BAND) No. Parameter 1 2 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency EQ High Gain Display Value See Table 50Hz~2.0kHz -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz -12~+12dB 8-40 52-76 28-58 52-76 table#3 Control table#3 7 8 9 10 11 Value Data 0.0 32 0.1 33 0.2 34 0.3 35 0.4 36 0.5 37 0.6 38 0.7 39 0.8 40 0.9 41 1.0 42 1.1 43 1.2 44 1.3 45 1.4 46 1.5 47 1.6 48 1.7 49 1.8 50 1.9 51 2.0 52 2.1 53 2.2 54 2.3 55 2.4 56 2.5 57 2.6 58 2.7 59 2.8 60 2.9 61 3.0 62 3.1 63 Value Data 6.4 96 6.5 97 6.6 98 6.7 99 6.8 100 6.9 101 7.0 102 7.1 103 7.2 104 7.3 105 7.4 106 7.5 107 7.6 108 7.7 109 7.8 110 7.9 111 8.0 112 8.1 113 8.2 114 8.3 115 8.4 116 8.5 117 8.6 118 8.7 119 8.8 120 8.9 121 9.0 122 9.1 123 9.2 124 9.3 125 9.4 126 9.5 127 12 13 14 15 16 Table#3 EQ Frequency Data 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 AUTO WAH No. Parameter Display Value See Table 1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 table#1 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 3 4 5 6 Cutoff Frequency Offset 50Hz~14.0kHz Resonance 1.0~12.0 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 table#3 7 8 EQ Low Gain EQ High Frequency -12~+12dB 500Hz~16.0kHz 52-76 28-58 table#3 EQ High Gain Dry/Wet -12~+12dB D63>W ~ D=W ~ D<W63 52-76 1-127 9 10 11 0-127 10-120 table#9 Control ● 12 13 14 15 16 NOTE The parameter depth marked with a ● can be controlled by the ASSIGN 1 Sound Control Knob or Foot Controller when properly assigned. The parameter numbers at far left correspond to the parameter suffix numbers in MIDI Data Table <1-4> (MIDI Data Format) in the "Data List" book. 51 Value THRU(20) 22 25 28 32 36 40 45 50 56 63 70 80 90 100 110 125 140 160 180 200 225 250 280 315 355 400 450 500 560 630 700 Data Value 32 800 33 900 34 1.0k 35 1.1k 36 1.2k 37 1.4k 38 1.6k 39 1.8k 40 2.0k 41 2.2k 42 2.5k 43 2.8k 44 3.2k 45 3.6k 46 4.0k 47 4.5k 48 5.0k 49 5.6k 50 6.3k 51 7.0k 52 8.0k 53 9.0k 54 10.0k 55 11.0k 56 12.0k 57 14.0k 58 16.0k 59 18.0k 60 THRU(20.0k) Table#4 Reverb time Table#7 Delay Time(400.0ms) Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.3 32 3.5 64 17.0 1 0.4 33 3.6 65 18.0 2 0.5 34 3.7 66 19.0 3 0.6 35 3.8 67 20.0 4 0.7 36 3.9 68 25.0 5 0.8 37 4.0 69 30.0 6 0.9 38 4.1 7 1.0 39 4.2 8 1.1 40 4.3 9 1.2 41 4.4 10 1.3 42 4.5 11 1.4 43 4.6 12 1.5 44 4.7 13 1.6 45 4.8 14 1.7 46 4.9 15 1.8 47 5.0 16 1.9 48 5.5 17 2.0 49 6.0 18 2.1 50 6.5 19 2.2 51 7.0 20 2.3 52 7.5 21 2.4 53 8.0 22 2.5 54 8.5 23 2.6 55 9.0 24 2.7 56 9.5 25 2.8 57 10.0 26 2.9 58 11.0 27 3.0 59 12.0 28 3.1 60 13.0 29 3.2 61 14.0 30 3.3 62 15.0 31 3.4 63 16.0 Data Value Data 0 0.1 32 1 3.2 33 2 6.4 34 3 9.5 35 4 12.7 36 5 15.8 37 6 19.0 38 7 22.1 39 8 25.3 40 9 28.4 41 10 31.6 42 11 34.7 43 12 37.9 44 13 41.0 45 14 44.2 46 15 47.3 47 16 50.5 48 17 53.6 49 18 56.8 50 19 59.9 51 20 63.1 52 21 66.2 53 22 69.4 54 23 72.5 55 24 75.7 56 25 78.8 57 26 82.0 58 27 85.1 59 28 88.3 60 29 91.4 61 30 94.6 62 31 97.7 63 Table#5 Delay Time(200.0ms) Data Value Data Value Data 0 0.1 32 50.5 64 1 1.7 33 52.0 65 2 3.2 34 53.6 66 3 4.8 35 55.2 67 4 6.4 36 56.8 68 5 8.0 37 58.3 69 6 9.5 38 59.9 70 7 11.1 39 61.5 71 8 12.7 40 63.1 72 9 14.3 41 64.6 73 10 15.8 42 66.2 74 11 17.4 43 67.8 75 12 19.0 44 69.4 76 13 20.6 45 70.9 77 14 22.1 46 72.5 78 15 23.7 47 74.1 79 16 25.3 48 75.7 80 17 26.9 49 77.2 81 18 28.4 50 78.8 82 19 30.0 51 80.4 83 20 31.6 52 81.9 84 21 33.2 53 83.5 85 22 34.7 54 85.1 86 23 36.3 55 86.7 87 24 37.9 56 88.2 88 25 39.5 57 89.8 89 26 41.0 58 91.4 90 27 42.6 59 93.0 91 28 44.2 60 94.5 92 29 45.7 61 96.1 93 30 47.3 62 97.7 94 31 48.9 63 99.3 95 Value Data 100.9 64 104.0 65 107.2 66 110.3 67 113.5 68 116.6 69 119.8 70 122.9 71 126.1 72 129.2 73 132.4 74 135.5 75 138.6 76 141.8 77 144.9 78 148.1 79 151.2 80 154.4 81 157.5 82 160.7 83 163.8 84 167.0 85 170.1 86 173.3 87 176.4 88 179.6 89 182.7 90 185.9 91 189.0 92 192.2 93 195.3 94 198.5 95 Value Data 201.6 96 204.8 97 207.9 98 211.1 99 214.2 100 217.4 101 220.5 102 223.7 103 226.8 104 230.0 105 233.1 106 236.3 107 239.4 108 242.6 109 245.7 110 248.9 111 252.0 112 255.2 113 258.3 114 261.5 115 264.6 116 267.7 117 270.9 118 274.0 119 277.2 120 280.3 121 283.5 122 286.6 123 289.8 124 292.9 125 296.1 126 299.2 127 Value 302.4 305.5 308.7 311.8 315.0 318.1 321.3 324.4 327.6 330.7 333.9 337.0 340.2 343.3 346.5 349.6 352.8 355.9 359.1 362.2 365.4 368.5 371.7 374.8 378.0 381.1 384.3 387.4 390.6 393.7 396.9 400.0 Table#8 Reverb Width;Depth;Height Value Data 100.8 96 102.4 97 104.0 98 105.6 99 107.1 100 108.7 101 110.3 102 111.9 103 113.4 104 115.0 105 116.6 106 118.2 107 119.7 108 121.3 109 122.9 110 124.4 111 126.0 112 127.6 113 129.2 114 130.7 115 132.3 116 133.9 117 135.5 118 137.0 119 138.6 120 140.2 121 141.8 122 143.3 123 144.9 124 146.5 125 148.1 126 149.6 127 Value 151.2 152.8 154.4 155.9 157.5 159.1 160.6 162.2 163.8 165.4 166.9 168.5 170.1 171.7 173.2 174.8 176.4 178.0 179.5 181.1 182.7 184.3 185.8 187.4 189.0 190.6 192.1 193.7 195.3 196.9 198.4 200.0 Data Value Data Value Data Value Data Value 0 0.5 32 8.8 64 17.6 96 27.5 1 0.8 33 9.1 65 17.9 97 27.8 2 1.0 34 9.4 66 18.2 98 28.1 3 1.3 35 9.6 67 18.5 99 28.5 4 1.5 36 9.9 68 18.8 100 28.8 5 1.8 37 10.2 69 19.1 101 29.2 6 2.0 38 10.4 70 19.4 102 29.5 7 2.3 39 10.7 71 19.7 103 29.9 8 2.6 40 11.0 72 20.0 104 30.2 9 2.8 41 11.2 73 20.2 10 3.1 42 11.5 74 20.5 11 3.3 43 11.8 75 20.8 12 3.6 44 12.1 76 21.1 13 3.9 45 12.3 77 21.4 14 4.1 46 12.6 78 21.7 15 4.4 47 12.9 79 22.0 16 4.6 48 13.1 80 22.4 17 4.9 49 13.4 81 22.7 18 5.2 50 13.7 82 23.0 19 5.4 51 14.0 83 23.3 20 5.7 52 14.2 84 23.6 21 5.9 53 14.5 85 23.9 22 6.2 54 14.8 86 24.2 23 6.5 55 15.1 87 24.5 24 6.7 56 15.4 88 24.9 25 7.0 57 15.6 89 25.2 26 7.2 58 15.9 90 25.5 27 7.5 59 16.2 91 25.8 28 7.8 60 16.5 92 26.1 29 8.0 61 16.8 93 26.5 30 8.3 62 17.1 94 26.8 31 8.6 63 17.3 95 27.1 Table#6 Room Size Table#9 Cutoff Frequency Offset Data Value Data Value 0 0.1 32 5.1 1 0.3 33 5.3 2 0.4 34 5.4 3 0.6 35 5.6 4 0.7 36 5.7 5 0.9 37 5.9 6 1.0 38 6.1 7 1.2 39 6.2 8 1.4 40 6.4 9 1.5 41 6.5 10 1.7 42 6.7 11 1.8 43 6.8 12 2.0 44 7.0 13 2.1 14 2.3 15 2.5 16 2.6 17 2.8 18 2.9 19 3.1 20 3.2 21 3.4 22 3.5 23 3.7 24 3.9 25 4.0 26 4.2 27 4.3 28 4.5 29 4.6 30 4.8 31 5.0 Data Value Data 0 50 32 1 55 33 2 60 34 3 66 35 4 72 36 5 80 37 6 86 38 7 94 39 8 100 40 9 110 41 10 120 42 11 130 43 12 140 44 13 150 45 14 162 46 15 174 47 16 186 48 17 200 49 18 215 50 19 230 51 20 245 52 21 260 53 22 280 54 23 300 55 24 315 56 25 335 57 26 355 58 27 380 59 28 400 60 29 425 61 30 450 62 31 475 63 52 Value Data 500 64 530 65 560 66 590 67 620 68 650 69 680 70 720 71 760 72 800 73 840 74 880 75 920 76 960 77 1.00k 78 1.05k 79 1.10k 80 1.15k 81 1.20k 82 1.26k 83 1.32k 84 1.38k 85 1.43k 86 1.50k 87 1.56k 88 1.62k 89 1.69k 90 1.76k 91 1.83k 92 1.90k 93 1.98k 94 2.06k 95 Value Data 2.14k 96 2.22k 97 2.31k 98 2.40k 99 2.49k 100 2.58k 101 2.67k 102 2.77k 103 2.87k 104 2.97k 105 3.08k 106 3.19k 107 3.30k 108 3.41k 109 3.53k 110 3.65k 111 3.77k 112 3.90k 113 4.03k 114 4.16k 115 4.29k 116 4.43k 117 4.57k 118 4.72k 119 4.87k 120 5.02k 121 5.18k 122 5.34k 123 5.50k 124 5.67k 125 5.84k 126 6.02k 127 Value 6.20k 6.38k 6.56k 6.75k 6.95k 7.15k 7.35k 7.56k 7.78k 8.00k 8.22k 8.44k 8.67k 8.90k 9.14k 9.38k 9.63k 9.90k 10.2k 10.4k 10.7k 10.9k 11.2k 11.5k 11.8k 12.1k 12.4k 12.7k 13.0k 13.3k 13.7k 14.0k MIDI is an acronym that stands for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, which allows electronic musical instruments to communicate with each other, by sending and receiving compatible Note, Control Change, Program Change and various other types of MIDI data, or messages. The CS1x can control a MIDI device by transmitting note related data and various types of controller data. The CS1x can be controlled by the incoming MIDI messages which automatically determine tone generator mode, select MIDI channels, voices and effects, change parameter values, and of course play the voices specified for the various Parts. MIDI Messages Transmitted/Received by the CS1x 1.2.2 Modulation (Control #001) Messages which control vibrato depth using the Modulation Wheel. MIDI messages can be divided into two groups: Channel messages and System messages. Below is an explanation of the various types of MIDI messages which the CS1x can receive/transmit. Setting the value to 127 produces maximum vibrato and 0 results in vibrato off. 1.2.3 1. CHANNEL MESSAGES Portamento Time (Control #005) Messages which control the duration of portamento, or a continuous pitch glide between successively played notes. Channel messages are the data related to the performance on the keyboard for the specific channel. When the parameter 1.2.10 Portamento Switch is set to on, the value set here can adjust the speed of pitch change. 1.1 Note On/Note Off (Key On/Key Off) Setting the value to 127 produces maximum portamento time and 0 results in minimum portamento time. Messages which are generated when the keyboard is played. Reception note range = C-2 (0) - G8 (127), C3 = 60 1.2.4 Velocity range = 1 - 127 (Only the Note On velocity is received) Note On: Generated when a key is pressed. Data Entry MSB (Control #006) Data Entry LSB (Control #038) Messages which set the value for the parameter specified by 1.2.23RPN MSB/LSB and 1.2.22 NRPN MSB/LSB. Note Off: Generated when a key is released. Each message includes a specific note number which corresponds to the key which is pressed, plus a velocity value based on how hard the key is struck. Parameter value is determined by combining MSB and LSB. 1.2.5 Main Volume (Control #007) Messages which control the volume of each Part. 1.2 Control Change Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. Control Change messages let you select a voice bank, control volume, panning, modulation, portamento time, brightness and various other controller parameters, through specific Control Change numbers which correspond to each of the various parameters. 1.2.1 The messages 007 (Main Volume) or 011 (Expression) will be transmitted using an optional controller connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack on the rear panel if an appropriate setting is selected in the Assign Control Number section in Utility mode. Bank Select MSB (Control #000) Bank Select LSB (Control #032) 1.2.6 Pan (Control #010) Messages which select variation voice bank numbers by combining and sending the MSB and LSB from an external device. Messages which control the stereo panning position of each Part (for stereo output). MSB and LSB functions differently depending on the tone generator mode. Setting the value to 127 positions the sound to the far right and 0 positions the sound to the far left. In XG mode, MSB numbers select voice type (Normal Voice or Drum Voice), and LSB numbers select voice banks. 1.2.7 In TG300B mode, LSB is fixed, and MSB numbers select voice banks. Expression (Control #011) Messages which control intonation expression of each Part during performance. (For more information about Banks and Programs, see Voice List in the "Data List" book.) Setting the value to 127 produces maximum volume and 0 results in volume off. A new bank selection will not become effective until the next Program Change message is received. The messeges 007 (Main Volume) or 011 (Expression) will be transmitted using an optional controller connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack on the rear panel if an appropriate setting is selected in the Assign Control Number section in Utility mode. 53 1.2.8 General Purpose 1, 2, 3, 4 (Control #016, 017, 018, 019) 1.2.17 Portamento Control (Control #084) Messages which apply a portamento between the currentlysounding note and the subsequent note. Control #016 are messages which are transmitted by operating the connected Foot Controller, used to control specific parameter such as voice parameters and Variation effect parameters. Control #017 and Control #018 are messages which are transmitted by operating the ASSIGN1 and ASSIGN2 knobs, respectively. Control #019 is undefined. 1.2.9 Portamento Control is transmitted specifying the note-on key of the currently-sounding note. Specify a Portamento Source Key number between 0 - 127. When a Portamento Control message is received, the currently sounding pitch will change with a Portamento Time of 0 to the next note-on key on the same channel. Hold1 (Control #064) Messages which control sustain on/off. For example, the following settings would apply a portamento from note C3 to C4. Setting the value between 64 - 127 turns the sustain on, between 0 63 turns the sustain off. 90H 3CH 7FH B0H 54H 3CH 90H 48H 7FH 1.2.10 Portamento Switch (Control #065) Messages which control portamento on/off. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the portamento on, between 0 - 63 turns the portamento off. C3 Note on Source key number set to C3 C4 Note on (When C4 is on, C3 is raised by a portamento to C4.) 1.2.18 Effect1 Depth (Reverb Send Level) (Control #091) Messages which adjust the send level for the Reverb effect. 1.2.11 Sostenuto (Control #066) Messages which control sostenuto on/off. 1.2.19 Effect3 Depth (Chorus Send Level) (Control #093) Holding specific notes and then pressing and holding the sostenuto pedal will sustain those notes as you play subsequent notes, until the pedal is released. Messages which adjust the send level for the Chorus effect. 1.2.20 Effect4 Depth (Variation Effect Send Level) (Control #094) Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the sostenuto on, between 0 - 63 turns the sostenuto off. Messages which adjust the send level for the Variation effect. If Variation effect uses System effect, this message sets the send level for the Variation effect. If it uses Insertion effect, this setting is invalid. 1.2.12 Soft Pedal (Control #067) Messages which control soft pedal on/off. Notes played while holding the soft pedal will be dampened. Setting the value between 64 -127 turns the soft pedal on, between 0 - 63 turns the soft pedal off. 1.2.21 Data Increment (Control #096) Decrement (Control #097) for RPN 1.2.13 Harmonic Content (Control #071) Messages which increase or decrease the MSB value of pitch bend sensitivity, fine tune, or coarse tune in steps of 1. You are required to assign one of those parameters using the RPN in the external device in advance. Messages which adjust the filter resonance set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. The data byte is ignored. When the maximum value or minimum value is reached, the value will not be incremented or decremented further. Higher values will result in a more characteristic, resonant sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. (Incrementing the fine tune will not cause the coarse tune to be incremented.) 1.2.14 Release Time (Control #072) 1.2.22 NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)LSB (Control #098) Messages which adjust the EG release time set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. NRPN (Non-Registered Parameter Number)MSB (Control #099) Messages which adjust a voice's vibrato, filter, EG, drum setup or other parameter settings. 1.2.15 Attack Time (Control #073) Messages which adjust the EG attack time set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. First send the NRPN MSB and NRPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use 1.2.4 Data Entry to set the value of the specified parameter. 1.2.16 Brightness (Control #074) Note that once the NRPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same NRPN's value change. Therefore, after you use the NRPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result. Messages which adjust the filter cutoff frequency set for each voice. The value set here is an offset value which will be added to or subtracted from the voice data. The following NRPN numbers can be received. Lower values will result in a softer sound. Depending on the voice, the effective range may be narrower than the range available for adjustment. 54 NRPN MSB 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 01 14 15 16 17 18 19 1A 1C 1D 1E 1F NRPN LSB 08 09 0A 20 21 63 64 66 rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr rr 1.2.24.2 Reset All Controllers (Control #121) PARAMETER Vibrato Rate Vibrato Depth Vibrato Delay Filter Cutoff Frequency Filter Resonance EG Attack Time EG Decay Time EG Release Time Drum Filter Cutoff Frequency Drum Filter Resonance Drum EG Attack Rate Drum EG Decay Rate Drum Pitch Coarse Drum Pitch Fine Drum Level Drum Pan Drum Reverb Send Level Drum Chorus Send Level Drum Variation Send Level The values of the following controllers will be reset to the defaults. CONTROLLER Pitch Bend Change Aftertouch Modulation Foot Controller Expression Hold1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Pedal Portamento Control RPN NRPN VALUE 0 (center) 0 (off) 0 (off) 0 (min) 127 (max) 0 (off) 0 (off)* 0 (off) 0 (off) Cancels the Portamento source key number Number not specified; internal data will not change Number not specified; internal data will not change * In Performance mode, 1 (on). *rr = Note number for each drum voice instrument. 1.2.24.3 All Notes Off (Control #123) Clears all notes currently on for the specified channel. However, if Hold1 or Sostenuto is on, notes will continue sounding until these are turned off. 1.2.23 RPN (Registered Parameter Number)LSB (Control #100) RPN (Registered Parameter Number)MSB (Control #101) 1.2.24.4 Mono (Control #126) Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and if the 3rd byte (mono number) is in the range of 0 - 16, sets the corresponding channel to Mono Mode (Mode 4 : m = 1). Messages which offset, or add or subtract values from a Part's pitch bend sensitivity, tuning, or other parameter settings. First send the RPN MSB and RPN LSB to specify the parameter which is to be controlled. Then use 1.2.21 Data Increment/Decrement to set the value of the specified parameter. 1.2.24.5 Poly (Control #127) Performs the same function as when an All Sounds Off message is received, and sets the corresponding channel to Poly Mode (Mode 3). Note that once the RPN has been set for a channel, subsequent data entry will be recognized as the same RPN's value change. Therefore after you use the RPN, you should set a Null (7FH, 7FH) value to avoid an unexpected result. 1.3 Program Change Messages which determine which voice to select for each Part. The following RPN numbers can be received. RPN MSB 00 00 00 7F RPN LSB 00 01 02 7F With a combination of Bank Select, you can select not only basic voice numbers, but also variation voice bank numbers. PARAMETER Pitch Bend Sensitivity Fine Tune Coarse Tune Null 1.4 Channel Aftertouch Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, over the entire channel. 1.5 Polyphonic Key Pressure 1.2.24 Channel Mode Messages Messages which let you control the sounds by the pressure you apply to the keys after the initial striking of the keys, for each individual key. The following Channel Mode Messages can be received. 2nd BYTE 120 121 123 126 127 3rd BYTE 0 0 0 0 ~ 16 0 MESSAGE All Sounds Off Reset All Controllers All Notes Off Mono Poly 1.6 Pitch Bend Pitch Bend messages are continuous controller messages that allow the pitch of designated notes to be raised or lowered by a specified amount over a specified duration. 1.2.24.1 All Sounds Off (Control #120) Clears all sounds currently sounding on the specified channel. However, the status of channel messages such as Note On and Hold On is maintained. 55 2. SYSTEM MESSAGES System messages are the data related to the overall system of the device. 2.1 System Exclusive Messages System Exclusive messages control various functions of the CS1x, including master volume and master tuning, tone generator mode, effect type and various other parameters. 2.1.1 General MIDI Mode On When General MIDI mode on is received, the tone generator mode will be changed to XG mode. When this happens, the CS1x will receive the MIDI messages which are compatible with GM System Level 1, and consequently will not receive NRPN and Bank Select messages. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message. F0 7E 7F 09 01 F7 (Hexadecimal) 2.1.2 Master Volume When received, the Volume MSB will be effective for the System Parameter. F0 7F 7F 04 01 ll mm F7 (Hexadecimal) * mm(MSB) = appropriate volume value, ll(LSB) = ignored 2.1.3 XG System On When this data is received, the CS1x will switch to XG mode and all the parameters will be initialized accordingly, and XG-compatible messages such as NRPN and Bank Select messages can be received. Since approximately 50ms is required to execute this message, be sure to leave an appropriate interval before the subsequent message. F0 43 1n 4C 00 00 7E 00 F7 (Hexadecimal) *n = device number TG300B Reset F0 41 1n 42 12 40 00 7F 00 41 F7 (Hexadecimal) *n = device number 2.2 Active Sensing (Receive only) Once FE (Active Sensing) has been received, if no MIDI data is subsequently received for longer than an interval of approximately 300msec, the CS1x will perform the same function as when All Sounds Off, All Notes Off, and Reset All Controllers messages are received, and will then return to a status in which FE is not monitored. Refer to the MIDI Data Format in the "Data List" book for more information on the various messages. 56 KEYBOARD 61 keys with Initial Touch TONE GENERATOR AWM2 (Wave ROM 4.5MB) POLYPHONY 32 notes MULTI TIMBRE 16 (DVA) PERFORMANCE 128 Presets, 128 Users VOICE Normal Voice XG 480 TG300B 579 Voices For Performances Drum Voice XG TG300B 11 10 ARPEGGIATOR 30 EFFECT Reverb 11 Chorus Variation 11 43 CONTROLS POWER, VOLUME, PITCH, MODULATION, Sound Control Knobs 6, SCENE 1/2, Numeric Keypad, ENTER, Mode Select (PERFORMANCE, MULTI, STORE, UTILITY), ARPEGGIATOR, SHIFT/OCTAVE, PART/LAYER +/-, PRESET, USER, PROGRAM +/-, Edit Parameter Rotary Switch, Parameter Value Up/Down buttons 10 DISPLAY LCD (Back Lit) TERMINALS PHONES(Stereo Phone), OUTPUT(Phone): L[MONO]/R, DC IN, FOOT VOLUME, FOOT CONTROLLER, FOOTSWITCH, INPUT, TO HOST, HOST SELECT, MIDI IN/OUT/THRU POWER SUPPLY AC adaptor PA-3B OUTPUT IMPEDANCE Line: 10kΩ, Phones: 33Ω DIMENSIONS 976(W) ˛ 285(D) ˛ 103(H)mm (38 3/8" ˛ 11 1/4" ˛ 4 1/16") WEIGHT 5.7kg (12 lbs., 9 oz.) ACCESSORIES Yamaha AC Adaptor PA-3B Owner's Manual, Data List Specifications and descriptions in this owner's manual are for information purposes only. Yamaha Corp. reserves the right to change or modify products or specifications at any time without prior notice. Since specifications, equipment or options may not be the same in every locale, please check with your Yamaha dealer. 57 The following table provides troubleshooting hints and page references for some common problems. Most problems may be simply the result of incorrect settings. Before calling for professional service, refer to the troubleshooting advice below to see if you can find and correct the cause of the problem. No sound. ● Is the volume set appropriately? (Page 6) ● When the Foot Controller is connected to the FOOT VOLUME jack, is the Foot Volume pressed down? (Page 8) ● Are the volume settings for each Layer/Part appropriate? (Page 33, 37) ● Are the effect settings appropriate? (Page 24, 49) ● Is the Bank set to off? (Page 33, 37) ● Is the receive channel set to off? (Page 42) ● Is the audio equipment connected appropriately? (Page 9) ● Is Local set to off? (Page 42) ● If you are playing back song data using an external device, are the volume related settings for the song appropriate? ● Are the Note Limit settings and/or Velocity Limit settings appropriate? (Page 27, 28) No Arpeggiator sound. ● Are the settings for the Velocity Limit appropriate? Set Velocity Limit Low to "0" and Velocity Limit Hi to "127". (Page 28) Distorted sounds. ● Are the effect settings appropriate? (Page 23, 34, 38) ● Is the volume level set too loud? Small sounds. ● Is the MIDI volume or MIDI expression set too low? Wrong pitch. ● Are the tuning-related parameters set to "0"? Check the Note Shift setting (page 27), Detune setting (page 27), Master Tuning (page 40) and Keyboard Transpose setting (page 40). Sound is choppy and interrupted. ● The maximum polyphony of 32 notes (the number of notes that can be played simultaneously) has been exceeded. (Page 35, 39) Sound Control Knobs do not work. ● Is a Scene key turned on? (Page 16) Only one note sounds at a time. ● Is the play mode set to MONO? (Page 35, 39) Cannot enter Store mode. ● Is Performance mode selected? (Page 44) 58 The following messages may appear during operation, indicating problems or incorrect operation. Follow the instructions in the explanations below to remedy the problem. Battery Low The memory-backup battery is low; memory cannot be backed up. Store the necessary data to a MIDI data storage device such as Yamaha MIDI Data Filer MDF2, and have the battery changed by your local Yamaha dealer or any other authorized Yamaha service personnel. Device No.=off Error Cannot send MIDI bulk data since the Device Number is set to off. Device Number Error Cannot receive MIDI bulk data, due to improper Device Number setting. Match the device numbers for both the CS1x and the external device. TG-B Mode Error When TG300B mode is accidentally selected by receiving a TG300B reset message from an external device, you cannot perform edit operations. Press PERFORMANCE or MULTI button to exit the TG300B mode. Receiving Displays when the CS1x receives the bulk data with the compatible format. Continue normal operation. Rx Mode Error Displays when receiving Performance bulk data in Multi Play mode or XG effect bulk in Performance mode. 59 [–]/NO/QUICK PC button ......................................................................................... 7 Multi ......................................................................................................................... 17 Multi Part Edit ......................................................................................................... 36 Multi Play Mode ............................................................................................... 17, 36 Multi Structure ........................................................................................................ 17 MW (Modulation Wheel) ....................................................................................... 25 A About MIDI ............................................................................................................. 53 AEG (Ampitude Envelope Generator) .................................................................. 30 ARPEGGIATOR ................................................................................................... 11, 22 ARPEGGIATOR button ............................................................................................... 6 ASSIGN 1 PARAM (Parameter) .............................................................................. 26 ASSIGN 2 ................................................................................................................ 29 ASSIGN CTRL NO (Assign Control Change Number) .......................................... 43 N NOTE ........................................................................................................................ 27 Normal Voices ........................................................................................................ 37 Numeric Keypad ...................................................................................................... 7 B O BANK ................................................................................................................ 33, 37 BULK DUMP (Performance Bulk Dump) .............................................................. 42 OUTPUT jacks ........................................................................................................... 8 P C Edit Parameter Rotary Switch .................................................................................. 7 EFFECT ........................................................................................................ 23, 34, 38 Effect Data Assign Table ........................................................................................ 51 Effect Parameter List ............................................................................................. 49 Effect Type List ........................................................................................................ 49 Effects (System and Insertion) ................................................................................ 47 ENTER/YES button ..................................................................................................... 7 Error Messages ..................................................................................................... 59 P BEND RANGE (Pitch Bend Range) ..................................................................... 25 PAN ................................................................................................................... 34, 38 Parameter Value UP/DOWN Buttons ..................................................................... 7 PART/LAYER button ................................................................................................... 7 PEG (Pitch Envelope Generator) ........................................................................... 32 PERFORM LEVEL ..................................................................................................... 23 PERFORM NAME .................................................................................................... 24 Performance Edit mode ........................................................................................ 21 Performance Mode ......................................................................................... 14, 20 Performance Play mode ...................................................................................... 20 Performance Structure ........................................................................................... 16 PHONES jack ............................................................................................................. 8 PITCH wheel ............................................................................................................. 7 POLY/MONO .................................................................................................... 35, 39 PORTA (Portamento) .............................................................................................. 26 POWER switch ........................................................................................................... 8 PRESET button ........................................................................................................... 7 PROGRAM ........................................................................................................ 33, 37 PROGRAM [–]/[+] button .......................................................................................... 7 F Q Factory Settings ..................................................................................................... 46 FC (Foot Control) ..................................................................................................... 26 FEG (Filter Envelope Generator) ............................................................................. 31 FILTER ................................................................................................................ 34, 38 FOOT CONTROLLER jack ........................................................................................... 8 FOOT VOLUME jack .................................................................................................. 8 FOOTSWITCH jack ..................................................................................................... 8 Quick Program Change ........................................................................................ 21 Common Edit 1 ...................................................................................................... 22 Common Edit 2 ...................................................................................................... 25 D DC IN jack ................................................................................................................. 8 Demo Song .............................................................................................................. 11 DEVICE NO (Device Number) ................................................................................ 42 Drum Voices ........................................................................................................... 37 E R RCV CH (Receive Channel) ................................................................................... 42 S SCENE 1 & 2 buttons ................................................................................................. 6 Scenes .............................................................................................................. 16, 45 SHIFT button .............................................................................................................. 7 SOUND CONTROL KNOBS ....................................................................................... 6 Store Mode ............................................................................................................ 44 SYSTEM ................................................................................................................... 40 H HOST SELECT switch ................................................................................................. 8 I INPUT jack ................................................................................................................. 8 T K TG300B Mode ........................................................................................................ 37 TO HOST terminal ..................................................................................................... 8 TRANS CH (Transmit Channel) ............................................................................... 41 TUNE ........................................................................................................................ 27 KBD TRANS (Keyboard Transpose) ...................................................................... 40 L Layer Edit 1 .............................................................................................................. 27 Layer Edit 2 ............................................................................................................. 30 Layer Edit 3 .............................................................................................................. 31 Layer Edit 4 ............................................................................................................. 33 Layers ...................................................................................................................... 16 LCD ............................................................................................................................ 7 LFO (Low Frequency Oscillator) ............................................................................. 30 LOCAL (Local On/Off) ............................................................................................. 42 U USER button .............................................................................................................. 7 Utility Mode ............................................................................................................ 40 V VEL (Velocity) ........................................................................................................... 28 VEL CURVE (Velocity Curve) .................................................................................... 41 VEL FIX (Velocity Fix) ................................................................................................ 41 VOLUME ........................................................................................................... 33, 37 VOLUME knob .......................................................................................................... 6 M MASTER TUNE ........................................................................................................ 40 MIDI ......................................................................................................................... 41 MIDI terminals .......................................................................................................... 8 Mode Select Switches .............................................................................................. 7 MODULATION wheel ................................................................................................ 7 X XG Operation ......................................................................................................... 17 60 120.q 97.6.3 2:52 PMy[W 1 For details of products, please contact your nearest Yamaha or the authorized distributor listed below. Pour plus de détails sur les produits, veuillez-vous adresser à Yamaha ou au distributeur le plus proche de vous figurant dans la liste suivante. NORTH AMERICA CANADA Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. 135 Milner Avenue, Scarborough, Ontario, M1S 3R1, Canada Tel: 416-298-1311 U.S.A. Yamaha Corporation of America 6600 Orangethorpe Ave., Buena Park, Calif. 90620, U.S.A. Tel: 714-522-9011 MIDDLE & SOUTH AMERICA Die Einzelheiten zu Produkten sind bei Ihrer unten aufgeführten Niederlassung und bei Yamaha Vertragshändlern in den jeweiligen Bestimmungsländern erhältlich. Para detalles sobre productos, contacte su tienda Yamaha más cercana o el distribuidor autorizado que se lista debajo. ITALY ASIA Yamaha Musica Italia S.P.A., Combo Division Viale Italia 88, 20020 Lainate (Milano), Italy Tel: 02-935-771 SPAIN Yamaha-Hazen Electronica Musical, S.A. Jorge Juan 30, 28001, Madrid, Spain Tel: 91-577-7270 PORTUGAL Valentim de Carvalho CI SA Estrada de Porto Salvo, Paço de Arcos 2780 Oeiras, Portugal Tel: 01-443-3398/4030/1823 GREECE MEXICO Yamaha De Mexico S.A. De C.V., Departamento de ventas Javier Rojo Gomez No.1149, Col. Gpe Del Moral, Deleg. Iztapalapa, 09300 Mexico, D.F. Tel: 686-00-33 BRASIL Yamaha Musical Do Brasil LTDA. Ave. Reboucas 2636, São Paulo, Brasil Tel: 011-853-1377 Philippe Nakas S.A. Navarinou Street 13, P.Code 10680, Athens, Greece Tel: 01-364-7111 SWEDEN Yamaha De Panama S.A. Edificio Interseco, Calle Elvira Mendez no.10, Piso 3, Oficina #105, Ciudad de Panama, Panama Tel: 507-69-5311 OTHER LATIN AMERICAN COUNTRIES AND CARIBBEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Music Latin America Corp. 6101 Blue Lagoon Drive, Miami, Florida 33126, U.S.A. Tel: 305-261-4111 EUROPE THE UNITED KINGDOM Yamaha-Kemble Music (U.K.) Ltd. Sherbourne Drive, Tilbrook, Milton Keynes, MK7 8BL, England Tel: 01908-366700 IRELAND Danfay Ltd. 61D, Sallynoggin Road, Dun Laoghaire, Co. Dublin Tel: 01-2859177 GERMANY/SWITZERLAND Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 AUSTRIA Yamaha Music Austria Schleiergasse 20, A-1100 Wien Austria Tel: 0222-60203900 BELGIUM Yamaha Music Belgium Keiberg Imperiastraat 8, 1930 Zaventem, Belgium Tel: 02-7258220 FRANCE Yamaha Musique France, Division Professionnelle BP 70-77312 Marne-la-Valée Cedex 2, France Tel: 01-64-61-4000 PT. Yamaha Music Indonesia (Distributor) PT. Nusantik Gedung Yamaha Music Center, Jalan Jend. Gatot Subroto Kav. 4, Jakarta 12930, Indonesia Tel: 21-520-2577 KOREA Cosmos Corporation #131-31, Neung-Dong, Sungdong-Ku, Seoul Korea Tel: 02-466-0021~5 MALAYSIA Yupangco Music Corporation 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue, P.O. Box 885 MCPO, Makati, Metro Manila, Philippines Tel: 819-7551 YS Copenhagen Liaison Office Generatorvej 8B DK-2730 Herlev, Denmark Tel: 44 92 49 00 SINGAPORE FINLAND Warner Music Finland OY/Fazer Music Aleksanterinkatu 11, P.O. Box 260 SF-00101 Helsinki, Finland Tel: 0435 011 NORWAY Narud Yamaha AS Grini Næringspark 17 N-1345 Østerås, Norway Tel: 67 14 47 90 Yamaha Music Asia Pte., Ltd. Blk 17A Toa Payoh #01-190 Lorong 7 Singapore 1231 Tel: 354-0133 TAIWAN Kung Hsue She Trading Co., Ltd. No. 322, Section 1, Fu Hsing S. Road, Taipei 106, Taiwan. R.O.C. Tel: 02-709-1266 THAILAND Siam Music Yamaha Co., Ltd. 865 Phornprapha Building, Rama I Road, Patumwan, Bangkok 10330, Thailand Tel: 2-215-3443 ICELAND Skifan HF Skeifan 17 P.O. Box 8120 IS-128 Reykjavik, Iceland Tel: 525 5000 OTHER EUROPEAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 THE PEOPLE’S REPUBLIC OF CHINA AND OTHER ASIAN COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430 Tel: 053-460-2317 OCEANIA AFRICA Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430 Tel: 053-460-2312 AUSTRALIA Yamaha Music Australia Pty. Ltd. 17-33 Market Street, South Melbourne, Vic. 3205, Australia Tel: 3-699-2388 NEW ZEALAND Music Houses of N.Z. Ltd. 146/148 Captain Springs Road, Te Papapa, Auckland, New Zealand Tel: 9-634-0099 MIDDLE EAST TURKEY/CYPRUS Yamaha Europa GmbH. Siemensstraße 22-34, 25462 Rellingen, F.R. of Germany Tel: 04101-3030 COUNTRIES AND TRUST TERRITORIES IN PACIFIC OCEAN OTHER COUNTRIES Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430 Tel: 053-460-2312 HEAD OFFICE SY11 INDONESIA PHILIPPINES THE NETHERLANDS Yamaha Music Nederland Kanaalweg 18G, 3526KL, Utrecht, The Netherlands Tel: 030-2828411 Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. 11/F., Silvercord Tower 1, 30 Canton Road, Tsimshatsui, Kowloon, Hong Kong Tel: 730-1098 Yamaha Music Malaysia, Sdn., Bhd. 16-28, Jalan SS 2/72, Petaling Jaya, Selangor, Malaysia Tel: 3-717-8977 Yamaha Scandinavia AB J. A. Wettergrens Gata 1 Box 30053 S-400 43 Göteborg, Sweden Tel: 031 89 34 00 DENMARK PANAMA HONG KONG Yamaha Corporation, International Marketing Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430 Tel: 053-460-2317 Yamaha Corporation, Electronic Musical Instrument Division Nakazawa-cho 10-1, Hamamatsu, Japan 430 Tel: 053-460-2445 SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION (USA) This product utilizes batteries or an external power supply (adapter). DO NOT connect this product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha. WARNING: Do not place this product in a position where anyone could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! IF you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electrician. This Product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by Yamaha. If a cart, etc., is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product. SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units. ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to produce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following: Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non-rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is approximately five years. When replacement becomes necessary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement. This Product may also use "household" type batteries. Some of these may be rechargeable. Make sure that the battery being charged is a rechargeable type and that the charger is intended for the battery being charged. When installing batteries, do not mix old batteries with new, or with batteries of a different type. Batteries MUST be installed correctly. Mismatches or incorrect installation may result in overheating and battery case rupture. This product, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for long periods of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs. Warning: Do not attempt to disassemble, or incinerate any battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by the laws in your area. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied with the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed. Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well secured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended. NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowledge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturer's warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and consult Disposal Notice: Should this Product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is considered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc. If your dealer is unable to assist you, Please contact Yamaha directly. Note: Check with any retailer of household type batteries in your area for battery disposal information. NAME PLATE LOCATION: The name Plate is located on the bottom of the product. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase. your dealer before requesting service. Model Serial No. Purchase Date PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL 92-BP FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class "B" digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the user's manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit "OFF" and "ON", please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures : Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the your local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejiatig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennttu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. NEDERLAND NETHERLAND ● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. ● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. ● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 ● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address : Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel : 030-2828425 ● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. ● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste.
  • Page 1 1
  • Page 2 2
  • Page 3 3
  • Page 4 4
  • Page 5 5
  • Page 6 6
  • Page 7 7
  • Page 8 8
  • Page 9 9
  • Page 10 10
  • Page 11 11
  • Page 12 12
  • Page 13 13
  • Page 14 14
  • Page 15 15
  • Page 16 16
  • Page 17 17
  • Page 18 18
  • Page 19 19
  • Page 20 20
  • Page 21 21
  • Page 22 22
  • Page 23 23
  • Page 24 24
  • Page 25 25
  • Page 26 26
  • Page 27 27
  • Page 28 28
  • Page 29 29
  • Page 30 30
  • Page 31 31
  • Page 32 32
  • Page 33 33
  • Page 34 34
  • Page 35 35
  • Page 36 36
  • Page 37 37
  • Page 38 38
  • Page 39 39
  • Page 40 40
  • Page 41 41
  • Page 42 42
  • Page 43 43
  • Page 44 44
  • Page 45 45
  • Page 46 46
  • Page 47 47
  • Page 48 48
  • Page 49 49
  • Page 50 50
  • Page 51 51
  • Page 52 52
  • Page 53 53
  • Page 54 54
  • Page 55 55
  • Page 56 56
  • Page 57 57
  • Page 58 58
  • Page 59 59
  • Page 60 60
  • Page 61 61
  • Page 62 62
  • Page 63 63
  • Page 64 64

Yamaha CS1X El manual del propietario

Categoría
Sintetizador
Tipo
El manual del propietario